Haward Technology Middle East API 510: Pressure Vessel Inspection Code: Maintenance, Inspection, Rating, Repair and Alteration (API Exam Preparation Training

QAF011a

Rev. 07 May 26, 07

Haward Technology Middle East

API 510: Pressure Vessel Inspection Code: Maintenance, Inspection, Rating, Repair and Alteration (API Exam Preparation Training)

August 17 – 28, 2008 Dubai, UAE Course Instructor Mr. Oran T. Lewis

©2008 Haward Technology Middle East This document is the property of the course instructor and/or Haward Technology Middle East. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Haward Technology Middle East. P.O.Box 26070, Abu Dhabi, UAE

Tel: +971-2-44 88 301

Fax: +971-2-44 88 302

Email: [email protected]

http://www.haward.org

To the Participant The Course Notes are intended as an aid in following lectures and for review in conjunction with your own notes; however they are not intended to be a complete textbook. If you spot any inaccuracy, kindly report it by completing this form and dispatching it to the following address, so that we can take the necessary action to rectify the matter.

Haward Technology Middle East P.O. Box 26070 Abu Dhabi, UAE Tel.:+971 2 4488301 Fax: +971 2 4488302 Email: [email protected]

Name Address

E-mail Course Title Course Date Course Location Description of Inaccuracy

Disclaimer

The information contained in these course notes has been compiled from various sources and is believed to be reliable and to represent the best current knowledge and opinion relative to the subject. Haward Technology offers no warranty, guarantee or representation as to its absolute correctness or sufficiency. Haward Technology has no responsibility in connection therewith; nor should it be assumed that all acceptable safety and regulatory measures are contained herein, or that other or additional information may be required under particular or exceptional circumstances.

Haward Technology Middle East COURSE OVERVIEW RE290-10D

API 510: Pressure Vessel Inspection Code: Maintenance, Inspection, Rating, Repair, and Alteration (API Exam Preparation Training) Course Title API 510: Pressure Vessel Inspection Code: Maintenance, Inspection, Rating, Repair and Alteration (API Exam Preparation Training)

Course Date/ Venue Course : August 17-28, 2008 Course Venue : Al Diwan Meeting Room, Coral Deira Hotel, Dubai, UAE Exam : December 03, 2008 Exam Venue : Al Majlis Ballroom, Crowne Plaza Hotel, Abu Dhabi, UAE

Course Reference RE290-10D

Course Duration/Credits 10 days (80 hours recommendations)/8.0 CEUs

as

per

API

Course Objectives This course is designed to train individuals who are interested in obtaining the API 510 Pressure Vessel Inspector Certification, as well as those who are seeking a better understanding of ASME Section VIII and IX code requirements. Included with the course is a pre-study guide and student classroom workbook. The student receives instruction regarding how to take the test, as well as insight into the intricacies of "real world" situations. Daily tests are designed to gauge students’ proficiency and understanding of the material. Topics include:  Head and Shell Calculations  Hydrostatic Test Pressure Calculations  Reinforcement Calculations  Shell External Pressure Calculations  Impact Test Requirements and Determination  Development and Review of Welding Documentation  NDE Requirements Haward Technology (ITAC) is proud of its 90% pass rate in API 510/570 examinations

Training Methodology This interactive training seminar includes the following training methodologies as a percentage of total tuition hours:50% 20% 30%

Lectures Workshops, Group Work & Practical Exercises Videos, Software & Case Studies

Who Should Attend The course is intended for Inspection Engineers who are seeking API-510 certification. Other engineers, managers or technical staffs who are dealing with Pressure Vessel will also benefit. RE290 - Page 1 of 7 . RE290-08-08 |Rev.54 |28 July 2008

Haward Technology Middle East Course Certificate Haward Technology certificate will be issued to all attendees completing minimum of 75% of the total tuition hours of the course.

Course Accreditation (1) Haward Technology’s courses/workshops/seminars meet the professional certification and continuing education requirements for participants seeking Continuing Education Units (CEUs) in accordance with the rules & regulations of the International Association for Continuing Education & Training (IACET). IACET is an international authority that evaluates programs according to strict, research-based criteria and guidelines. The CEU is an internationally accepted uniform unit of measurement in qualified courses of continuing education.

Haward Technology has been approved as an Authorized Provider by the International Association for Continuing Education and Training (IACET), 8405 Greensboro Drive, Suite 800, McLean, VA 22102, USA. In obtaining this approval, Haward Technology has demonstrated that it complies with the ANSI/IACET Standards which are widely recognized as standards of good practice internationally. As a result of our Authorized Provider membership status, Haward Technology is authorized to offer IACET CEUs for its programs that qualify under the ANSI/IACET Standards. Haward Technology Middle East will award 8.0 CEUs (Continuing Education Units) for participants who completed the total tuition hours of this program. One CEU is equivalent to ten Professional Development Hours (PDHs) or ten contact hours of the participation in and completion of Haward Technology programs. A permanent record of a participant’s involvement and awarding of CEU will be maintained by Haward Technology. Haward Technology will provide a copy of the participant’s CEU Transcript of Records upon request. (2) This API exam preparation training course complies with the API (American Petroleum Institute) regulations and is designed to prepare participants for API 510 exam that qualifies successful participants to the “API 510 Pressure Vessel Inspector Certification”.

Course Fee US $ 4,950 per Delegate. This rate inc ludes Participant’s Pack (Folder, Manual, Hand-outs, etc.), buffet lunch, coffee/tea on arrival, morning & afternoon of each day.

Accommodation Accommodation is not included in the course fees. However, any accommodation required can be arranged by Haward Technology at the time of booking.

Required Codes & Standards Listed below are the effective editions of the publications required for API 510, Pressure Vessel Inspector Certification Examination.  API Standard 510, Pressure Vessel Inspection Code: In-Service Inspection, Rating, Repair, and Alteration, 9th Edition, June 2006. IHS Product Code API CERT 510 

API Recommended Practice 571, Damage Mechanisms Affecting Fixed Equipment in the Refining Industry, 1st Edition, December 2003. IHS Product Code: API CERT 510_571 (includes only the portions listed below) RE290 - Page 2 of 7 . RE290-08-08 |Rev.54 |28 July 2008

Haward Technology Middle East ATTENTION: Only the following mechanisms to be included: Par. 4.2.3 – Temper Embrittlement 4.2.7 – Brittle Fracture 4.2.9 – Thermal Fatigue 4.2.14 – Erosion/Erosion-Corrosion 4.2.16 – Mechanical Failure 4.3.2 – Atmospheric Corrosion 4.3.3 – Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI) 4.3.4 – Cooling Water Corrosion 4.3.5 – Boiler Water Condensate Corrosion 4.4.2 – Sulfidation 4.5.1 – Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking (C1-SCC) 4.5.2 – Corrosion Fatigue 4.5.3 – Caustic Stress Corrosion Cracking (Caustic Embrittlement) 5.1.2.3 – Wet H2S Damage (Blistering/HIC/SOHIC/SCC) 5.1.3.1 – High Temperature Hydrogen Attack (HTHA)

 API Recommended Practice 572, Inspection of Pressure Vessels, 2nd Edition, February 2001. IHS Product Code API CERT 572  API Recommended Practice 576, Inspection of Pressure-Relieving Devices, 2nd Edition, December 2000.. IHS Product Code API CERT 576  API Recommended Practice 577 – Welding Inspection and Metallurgy, 1st edition, October 2004.. IHS Product Code API CERT 577  American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2004 edition with 2005 addenda and 2006 addenda. i. Section V,

Nondestructive Examination, Articles 1, 2, 6, 7 and 23 (section SE-797 only)

ii. Section VIII,

Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels, Division I, U, UG, UW, UCS, UHT, Appendices 1-4, 6, 8 and 12

iii. Section IX,

Welding and Brazing Qualifications, Welding only

IHS Product Code for the ASME package API CERT 510 ASME. Package includes only the above excerpts necessary for the exam. API and ASME publications may be ordered through IHS (formerly IHS Documents) Documents at 303-397-7956 or 800-854-7179. Product codes are listed above. Orders may also be faxed to 303-397-2740. More information is available at http://www.ihs.com. API members are eligible for a 30% discount on all API documents; exam candidates are eligible for a 20% discount on all API documents. When calling to order please identify yourself as an exam candidate and/or API member. Prices quoted will reflect the applicable discounts. No discounts will be made for ASME documents. Note: API and ASME publications are copyrighted material. Photocopies of API and ASME publications are not permitted. CD-ROM versions of the API documents are issued quarterly by Information Handling Services and are allowed. Be sure to check your CD-ROM against the editions noted on this sheet.

Course Instructor Mr. Oran T. Lew is, P.E. (Texas, USA) is an Adjunct Instructor with over 25 years experience in the design, erection, maintenance, inspection, fabrication, modification and repair of pressure equipment, as well as presenting educational courses for piping inspection, w elding, weld inspection, and pressure equipment inspection. RE290 - Page 3 of 7 . RE290-08-08 |Rev.54 |28 July 2008

Haward Technology Middle East Mr. Lewis has a Bsc degree and he is a qualified American National Board Trainer and an NDE Trainer. Further, he is a AWS Certified Welding Inspector, API Certified Pressure Vessel Inspector, API Certified Piping Inspector, a member of the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors Commission and a Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspector - State of Texas.

Course Program The following program is planned for this course. However, the course instructor(s) may modify this program before or during the course for technical reasons with no prior notice to participants. Nevertheless, the course objectives will always be met: Day 1: Sunday, 17th of August 2008 0730 - 0800 Registration & Coffee 0800 - 0810 0810 - 0825 0825 - 1000

Welcome & Introduction

PRE-TEST Service Restrictions - Joint Efficiencies - Radiography ●

1000 - 1015 1015 - 1230

UW-3 Weld Categories ● UW-51 RT Examination of Welded Joints ● UW52 Spot Examination of Welded Joints Break

Service Restrictions - Joint Efficiencies - Radiography (cont’d) ●

1230 - 1330 1330 - 1515

UW-11 RT and UT Examinations ● UW-12 Maximum Allowable Joint Efficiencies ● Exercises UW 3, 11 and 12 Lunch

Vessels under Internal Pressure – Shell and Head Calculations ● UG-27 Thickness

1515 - 1530 1530 - 1700

of Shells under Internal Pressure

Break

Vessels under Internal Pressure – Shell and Head Calculations (cont’d) ● UG-32

1700 Day 2: 0730 - 0830 0830 - 1000 1000 - 1015 1015 - 1230

Formulas and Rules for Using Formed Heads End of Day One Monday, 18th of August 2008

Review of Day 1 Exercise with Review Break

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure ● UG-98

1230 - 1330 1330 - 1515

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure

Lunch

Hydrostatic Head Pressure ● Hydrostatic

1515 - 1530 1530 - 1700

Head Calculations

Break

Hydrostatic – Pneumatic Tests ●

1700

UG-99 Hydrostatic Test Pressure and Procedure ● UG-100 Pneumatic Test Pressure and Procedure ● UG-102 Test Gages End of Day Two

Day 3: Tuesday, 19 th of August 2008 0730 - 0830 Review of Day 2 0830 - 1000 Exercise with Review RE290 - Page 4 of 7 . RE290-08-08 |Rev.54 |28 July 2008

Haward Technology Middle East 1000 - 1015 1015 - 1230

Break

1230 - 1330 1330 - 1515

Lunch

Postweld Heat Treatment Cylinder under External Pressure ● UG-28 Thickness

1515 - 1530 1530 - 1730

of Shells and Tubes (External Pressure)

Break

Charpy Impact Testing ●

1730

UCS-66 Materials ● UCS-67 Impact Testing of Welding Procedures ● UCS68 Design ● UG-84 Charpy Impact Test Requirements End of Day Three

Day 4: Wednesday, 20 th of August 2008 0730 - 0830 Review of Day 3 0830 - 1000 Exercise with Review 1000 - 1015 Break 1015 - 1230 Fillet Welds and Reinforcement ● UW-16 Weld Size Determination ● UG-36 Openings in Vessels ● UG-37 Reinforcement of Openings ● UG-40 Limits of Reinforcement 1230 - 1330 Lunch 1330 - 1515 Materials Name Plates Data Reports ● UG-77 Material Identification ● UG-93 Inspection of Materials ● UG-116 Name Plate Markings 1515 - 1530 Break 1530 - 1700 Materials Name Plates Data Reports (cont’d) ● UG-119 Name Plates ● UG-120 Data Reports 1700 End of Day Four Day 5: Thursday, 21st of August 2008 0730 - 0830 Review of Day 4 0830 - 1000 Exercise with Review 1000 - 1015 Break 1015 - 1230 Corrosion Calculations ● Inspection Interval ● Corrosion Rate and Remaining Life ● Long and Short Term Corrosion Rates 1230 - 1330 Lunch 1330 - 1515 ASME Section-IX Overview ● Article I General Requirements ● Article II Welding Procedure Qualifications 1515 - 1530 Break 1530 - 1700 ASME Section-IX Overview (cont’d) ● Article III Welding Performance Qualifications ● Article IV Welding Data 1700 End of Day Five Day 6: 0730 - 0830 0830 - 1000 1000 - 1015 1015 - 1230

Sunday, 24th of August 2008

Review of Day 5 Exercise with Review Break

Writing a Welding Procedure Specification ● Welding Procedures

1230 - 1330

by Essential Variables

Lunch RE290 - Page 5 of 7 . RE290-08-08 |Rev.54 |28 July 2008

Haward Technology Middle East 1330 - 1515

Welder’s Qualification ● Welder Testing and Qualification

1515 - 1530 1530 - 1700 1700

Break

Welder’s Qualification (cont’d) End of Day Six

Day 7: Monday, 25th of August 2008 0730 - 0830 Review of Day 6 0830 - 1000 Exercise with Review 1000 - 1015 Break 1015 - 1230 Review of WPS’s and PQR’s ● Practice WPS/PQR reviews 1230 - 1330 Lunch 1330 - 1515 ASME Section-V: NDE ● Article 1 General Requirements ● Article 2 Radiographic Testing ● Appendix 4 - Section VIII Rounded Indications ● Article 23 SE-797 Standard Practice for measuring thickness by the pulse-echo contact method ● Appendix 12 - Section VIII Ultrasonic Acceptance Criteria 1515 - 1530 Break 1530 - 1700 ASME Section-V: NDE (cont’d) ● Article 6 - Penetrant Testing ● Appendix 8 - Section VIII Methods for Liquid Penetrant Exam ● Article 7 - Magnetic Particle Examination ● Appendix 6 - Section Magnetic Particle Examination 1700 End of Day Seven Day 8: Tuesday, 26 th of August 2008 0730 - 0830 Review of Day 7 0830 - 1000 Exercise with Review 1000 - 1015 Break 1015 - 1230 API RP 577 Welding inspection and Metallurgy ● Definitions ● Welding Inspection ● Welding Processes ● Welding Procedure ● Welding Materials 1230 - 1330 Lunch 1330 - 1515 API RP 577 Welding inspection and Metallurgy (cont’d) ● Welder Qualification ● Non-Destructive Examination ● Metallurgy ● Refinery and Petrochemical Welding Issues ● Terminology and Symbols 1515 - 1530 Break 1530 - 1730 API RP 577 Welding inspection and Metallurgy (cont’d) ● Actions to Address Improperly made production welds ● Welding Procedure review ● Guide to common filler metals ● Example report of RT results 1730 End of Day Eight Day 9: Wednesday, 27 th of August 2008 0730 - 0830 Review of Day 8 0830 - 1000 Exercise with Review 1000 - 1015 Break 1015 - 1230 API RP 571 Damage Mechanisms ● Temper Embrittlement ● Brittle Fracture ● Thermal Fatigue ● Erosion/Erosion-Corrosion ● Mechanical Failure ● Atmospheric Corrosion ● Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI) ● Cooling Water Corrosion ● Boiler Water Condensate Corrosion ● Sulfidation ● Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking (ClRE290 - Page 6 of 7 . RE290-08-08 |Rev.54 |28 July 2008

Haward Technology Middle East

1230 - 1330 1330 - 1515

SCC) ● Corrosion Fatigue ● Caustic Stress Corrosion Cracking (Caustic Embrittlement) ● Wet H2S Damage (Blistering/HIC/SOHIC/SCC) ● High Temperature Hydrogen Attack (HTHA) Lunch

Overview - API 510 Inspections of Pressure Vessels ● Scope ●

Organization ● Types and Definitions of Maintenance Inspections ● Welding on Pressure Vessels ● Repairs and Alterations

Overview - API 576 Pressure Relieving Devices ● Scope ● Types

1515 - 1530 1530 - 1730

of pressure relieving devices ● Applications ● Limitations

Break

Overview - API 572 Inspection of Pressure Vessels ●

1730 Day 10: 0730 - 1030 1030 - 1045 1045 - 1345 1345 - 1445 1445 - 1645 1645 - 1700 1700 - 1730

1730

Scope ● Reasons for Inspection ● Causes of Deterioration ● Methods of Repairs ● Inspection Records and Report End of Day Nine Thursday, 28th of August 2008

Administer first half of API 510 practice examination #1 Break

Administer second half API 510 examination #1 Lunch

Review Exam result Break

Pass out API 510 practice examinations 2 and 3 with solutions. Closing comments Presentation of Certificates End of Course

Course Coordinator Maylyn Rodriguez, [email protected]

Tel:

+971-2-44

88

301,

Fax:

RE290 - Page 7 of 7 . RE290-08-08 |Rev.54 |28 July 2008

+971-2-44

88

302,

Email:

Table of Contents Section 1

Service Restrictions, Joint Efficiencies, and Radiography

Section 2

Head and Shell Calculations

Section 3

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure

Section 4

Hydrostatic Head Pressure

Section 5

Hydrostatic, Pneumatic Tests

Section 6

Post Weld Heat Treatment

Section 7

UG-28 External Pressure

Section 8

Charpy Impact Testing

Section 9

Fillet Welds and Reinforcement

Section 10

Materials, Name Plates, and Data Reports

Table of Contents Section 11

Corrosion Calculations

Section 12

Overview Section IX Article I Welding General Requirements

Section 13

Writing a Welding Procedure Specification

Section 14

Welder Performance Qualification Test

Section 15

Review of WPS’s and PQR’s

Section 16

ASME Section V NDE

Section 17

RP-577 Welding Inspection and Metallurgy

Section 18

RP 571 Damage Mechanism Affecting Fixed Equipment in the Refining Industry

Table of Contents Section 19

API 510 Pressure Testing and Welded Repairs

Section 20

Lesson Quizzes

Section 21

Solutions Lesson Quizzes

Section 1 Service Restrictions, Joint Efficiencies, and Radiography

API 510 Current for the December 2007 Examination

1

API 510 Examination Preparatory Fast Track Technical Table of Contents

Lesson 1

Service Restrictions/Joint Efficiencies/Radiography

7

Lesson 2

Shell and Head Calculations

33

Lesson 3

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure

47

Lesson 4

Hydrostatic Head Pressure

49

Lesson 5

Hydrostatic, Pneumatic Tests and Test Gauges

59

Lesson 6

Postweld Heat Treatment

65

Lesson 7

External Pressure Calculations

71

Lesson 8

Charpy Impact Testing

81

Lesson 9

Fillet Welds and Reinforcement Calculations

97

Lesson 10

Materials, Nameplates, and Data Reports

109

Lesson 11

Corrosion Calculations

113

Lesson 12

ASME Section IX Overview

121

Lesson 13

Writing a Welding Procedure Specification

147

Lesson 14

Welder Performance Qualification Test

179

Lesson 15

Review of WPS’s and PQR’s

199

Lesson 16

Section V NDE

221

Lesson 17

RP 577 Welding Inspections and Metallurgy

255

Lesson 18

RP 571 Damage Mechanisms

283

Lesson 19

API 510 Pressure Tests and Welded Repairs

299

2

Introduction

The API Exams are given the first Wednesday of December and December. The Exam is given in two sections. •

The morning is the Open Book portion.

•

The afternoon portion is Closed Book.

•

4 hours are allotted to each.

The Open Book portion you are allowed to have all the Code books and the API Recommended Practices to use as needed. These books can be highlighted, tabbed and may have hand written notes in the margins of the pages. The Closed Book portion you are not allowed to use the Code books or the API Recommended Practices. All questions are multiple choices; there are a total of 150 questions, each worth 2/3 point. The Open Book half will have from 45 to 55 questions. The balance of the questions will be on the second half Closed Book portion in the afternoon. The examination is scored using a curve. The number of correct questions to pass varies from exam to exam. A passing score is based on the difficulty level of questions from one exam to another. Each question when written is assigned a level of difficulty from 1 to 4, 4 being the hardest. If a given exam has a high number of harder questions, it may only require 98 correct to pass, likewise easier exams may require as many as 115 correct.

3

ASME CODES OVERVIEW

Section VIII Div.1 Unfired Pressure Vessels. Section VIII is divided into 3 Subsections. Subsection A General Rules which apply to all vessels Subsection B Methods of Fabrication Specific Rules based on method (s) used Subsection C Specific Rules Based on Material (s)

On the Exam you are responsible for: Subsection A Only Part of the UG rules that apply to all vessels no matter how they are made or what they are made of. Subsection B Only Part of the UW rules for vessel fabricated by welding. Subsection C Only Part of the UCS rules for vessel made of Carbon or Low Alloys.

4

About the course •

The course will start with Section VIII Subsection B Methods of Fabrication Part UW, Welding.

•

Next we will cover Part UG General Rules and calculations.

•

Then we will cover the material specific rules for Carbon and Low Alloy Steels Part UCS.

•

Upon completion of the Section VIII coverage we will commence Section IX Welding.

•

After Section IX we will be covering Section V NDE.

•

Then Selected Coverage from, RP 577 and RP 571 and API 510.

•

There will be quizzes throughout the course.

•

There will be homework reading assignments.

•

There will be exercises to complete between classes.

•

There will be a final exam.

•

You will receive 3 Practice Exams each with 150 questions and the solutions sheets for self study.

•

You need Yellow highlighters.

•

You need tabs.

•

A red pen or pencil (optional).

•

The KIS (Keep It Simple) principle applies. You need a simple calculator it need not have any math function higher than square root.

•

You may want a backup calculator during the exam.

5

6

Lesson 1 Service Restrictions, Joint Efficiencies, and Radiography Objectives •

Understand the service restrictions placed on weld joints based on service conditions.

•

Identify weld joints by Categories (location in vessel).

•

Identify welds by Types. (How made, double welded etc.).

•

Determine the accept/reject values for weld imperfections located using radiography.

•

Define the extent of radiography required by Code for a desired joint efficiency.

•

Find weld joint efficiency (E) by using Table UW-12.

•

Determine weld joint efficiencies based on RT markings.

•

Determine the E to be used for calculating the required thickness or allowed pressure for Seamless Shell sections and Seamless heads.

•

Understand the rules for using welded pipe and tubing.

7

ASME Section VIII UW-2 Service Restrictions (a) When vessels are to contain lethal substances footnote 1, either liquid or gaseous, all butt welded joints shall be fully radiographed, except under the provisions of UW-2(a)(2) and UW-2(a)(3) below, and UW-11(a)(4). When fabricated of carbon or low alloy steel, such vessels shall be postweld heat treated. Footnote 1 When a vessel is to contain fluids of such a nature that a very small amount mixed or unmixed with air is dangerous to life……….. If determined as lethal, … (1) The joints of various categories (see UW-3) shall be as follows. (a) Except under the provisions of (a)(2) or (a)(3) below, all joints of Category A shall be Type No. (1) of Table UW-12. (b) All joints of Categories B and C shall be Type No. (1) or No. (2) of Table UW-12. These are the only two types which are considered acceptable for radiography by Section VIII Div.1

Type 1 Double Welded butt joint or equivalent. Backing if used must be removed.

Type 2 Single welded butt joint with backing which remains in place.

8

UW-3 Welded Joint Category (a) The term “Category” as used herein defines the location of a joint in a vessel, but not the type of joint. (1) Category A. Longitudinal welded joints within the main shell, communicating chambers, transitions in diameter, or nozzles; any welded joint within a sphere, within a formed or flat head, or within the side plates of a flat-sided vessel; circumferential welded joints connecting hemispherical heads to main shells, to transitions in diameters, to nozzles, or to communicating chambers. (2) Category B. Circumferential welded joints within the main shell, communicating chambers, nozzles, or transitions in diameter including joints between the transition and a cylinder at either the large or small end; circumferential welded joints connecting formed heads other than hemispherical to main shells, to transitions in diameter, to nozzles, or to communicating chambers. (3) Category C. Welded joints connecting flanges, Van Stone laps, tubesheets, or flat heads to main shell, to formed heads, to transitions in diameter, to nozzles, or to communicating chambers any welded joint connecting one side plate to another side plate of a flat sided vessel. (4) Category D. Welded joints connecting communicating chambers or nozzles to main shells, to spheres, to transitions in diameter, to heads, or to flat-sided vessels, and those joints connecting nozzles to communicating chambers (for nozzles at the small end of a transition in diameter, see Category B). (b) When butt welded joints are required elsewhere in this Division for Category B, an angle joint connecting a transition in diameter to a cylinder shall be considered as meeting this requirement provided the angle a (see Fig. UW-3) does not exceed 30 deg. All requirements pertaining to the butt welded joint shall apply to the angle joint.

9

An important note: Hemispherical heads form a Category A joint between themselves and any other part, whether it is the shell, another hemispherical head, etc. Hemispherical Heads are never considered Seamless by Code rules. The Category A weld made by attaching the Hemispherical Head to shell is considered part of the Head for calculation purposes. Later on in this lesson we begin our discussion of formed seamless Heads. The formed heads on the exam that are considered seamless are Torispherical and Ellipsoidal, Hemispherical is not seamless by Code.

10

UW-51 Radiographic and Radioscopic Examination of Weld Joints (a) All welded joints to be radiographed shall be examined in accordance with Article 2 of Section V except as specified below. (1) A complete set of radiographs and records, ……shall be retained by the Manufacturer until the Manufacturer’s Data Report has been signed by the Inspector. (2) The Manufacturer shall certify that personnel have been qualified and certified in accordance with their employer’s written practice…… SNT-TC-1A shall be used as a guideline. …Alternatively, the ASNT Central Certification Program (ACCP), or CP-189 may be used to fulfill the examination and demonstration requirements of SNT-TC-1A and the employer’s written practice. (3) A written radiographic examination procedure is not required. Demonstration of density and penetrameter image requirements on production or technique radiographs shall be considered satisfactory evidence of compliance….. (4) The requirements of T-285 of Article 2 ….used only a guide. Final acceptance of radiographs shall be based on the ability to see the prescribed penetrameter image and the specified hole or the designated wire of a wire penetrameter.

11

(b) Indications shown on the radiographs of welds and characterized as imperfections are unacceptable under the following conditions and shall be repaired as provided in UW-38, and the repair radiographed to UW-51 or, at the option of the Manufacturer, ultrasonically examined in accordance with the method described in Appendix 12…. (1) any indication characterized as a crack or zone of incomplete fusion or penetration ;

(2) any other elongated indication on the radiograph which has length greater than: (a) 1/4 in. for t up to 3/4 in. (b)1/3t for t from 3/4 in. to 2-1/4 in. (c) 3/4 in. for t over 2-1/4 in. Where; t = the thickness of the weld excluding any allowable reinforcement.

For a butt weld joining two members having different thicknesses at the weld, t is the thinner of these two thicknesses. Since the value of t must be the lesser thickness this decreases the size of the maximum acceptable indication.

12

(3) any group of aligned indications that have an aggregate (total) length greater than t in a length of 12t, Example: t = 1” total length (L) cannot exceed 1” in 12” Also individual lengths cannot exceed the following: (b) 1/3t for t from 3/4 in. to 2-1/4 in. * In this example none of the individual indications can exceed 1/3 x 1” = 1/3” (.333”)

(3) except when the distance between the successive imperfections exceeds 6L where L is the length of the longest imperfection in the group; * This means that if the two groups are isolated from each other, they can be evaluated separately within a length of 12t.

(4) rounded indications in excess of that specified by the acceptance standards given in Appendix 4. Example from Appendix 4: More on this during the Section V Coverage.

13

UW-52 Spot Examinations of Weld Joints (b) Minimum Extent of Spot Radiographic Examination (1) One spot shall be examined on each vessel for each 50 ft increment of weld or fraction thereof for which a joint efficiency from column (b) of Table UW-12 is selected. However, for identical vessels, each with less than 50 ft of weld for which a joint efficiency from column (b) of Table UW-12 is selected, 50 ft increments of weld may be represented by one spot examination. *

The idea of this rule is that each 50’ increment is to be a hold point for approval; the next increment is not to be started until the previous one has been accepted. The drawing below is the simplest case; you will not see this often.

50' increment

*

This rule also addresses smaller, often machine welded vessels such as small air receivers. One is picked at random for spot radiography. If it passes, all are approved.

18' fraction

14

(2) For each increment of weld to be examined, a sufficient number of spot radiographs shall be taken to examine the welding of each welder or welding operator. Under conditions where two or more welders or welding operators make weld layers in a joint, or on the two sides of a double-welded butt joint, one spot may represent the work of all welders or welding operators. *

Every welder in a given 50’ increment must have his work radiographed. It can be a individual photo (radiograph) or a group picture. Here welder A was radiographed alone and B & C’s work was examined on the same radiograph. Welders B&C

Welder B & C on opposite sides of the weld.

50' increment

(3) Each spot examination shall be made as soon as practicable…... The location of the spot shall be chosen by the Inspector,… except that when the Inspector cannot be present or otherwise make the selection, the fabricator may exercise his own judgment in selecting the spots. (4) Radiographs required at specific locations to satisfy the rules of other paragraphs, such as UW-9(d), UW-11(a)(5)(b), and UW-14(b), shall not be used to satisfy the requirements for spot radiography. Note: UW-11(a)(5)(b), will be covered in depth later in this lesson. UW-9(d) (d) Except when the longitudinal joints are radiographed 4 in. each side of each circumferential welded intersection, vessels made up of two or more courses shall have the centers of the welded longitudinal joints of adjacent courses staggered or separated by a distance of at least five times the thickness of the thicker plate. * Longitudinal Welds Aligned must be radiographed for at least 4 inches on each side of the joint.

UW-14(b)

Single openings meeting the requirements given in UG-36(c)(3) may be located in head-toshell or Category B or C butt welded joints, provided the weld meets the radiographic requirements in UW-51 for a length equal to three times the diameter of the opening with the center of the hole at mid-length. Defects that are completely removed in cutting the hole shall not be considered in judging the acceptability of the weld. ** UW-51, not 52 to grade film.

15

* UG-36 (c)(3) addresses small opening which do not require reinforcement calculations. Summary The special radiography requirements given in UW-9 (d), UW-11(a)(5)(b) and UW-14 (b) cannot be substituted for any of the spot radiography required by UW-52. * We will see why this is significant when we commence our studies of “Joint Efficiencies” later.

16

UW-52 Spot Examinations of Weld Joints (c) Standards for Spot Radiographic Examination. Spot examination by radiography shall be made in accordance with the technique prescribed in UW51(a). The minimum length of spot radiograph shall be 6 in. (c)(3) Rounded indications are not a factor in the acceptability of welds that are not required to be fully radiographed. (d) Evaluations and Retests When a spot, radiographed as required in (b)(1) or (b)(2) above has been examined and the radiograph discloses welding which does not comply……….The locations shall be determined by the Inspector… if the two additional pass, repair the failed spot, if either of the two additional spots fail the entire rejected weld shall be removed and the joint re-welded or the entire increment completely radiographed and all defects corrected.

First Additional Radiograph

Orig. Rejected

50' increment

Second Additional Radiograph

First Additional Radiograph Acceptable

Repair and radiograph

Second Additional Radiograph Acceptable

50' increment

17

…, if either of the two additional spots fail the entire rejected weld shall be removed and the joint rewelded or the entire increment completely radiographed and all defects corrected. First Additional Radiograph Failed.

Original Rejected

Radiograph Entire 50'

50' increment

Or Second Additional Radiograph Failed.

Repair all defects in the 50' or remove all 50' then weld and apply spot radiography again.

50' increment

18

UW-11 Radiographic and Ultrasonic Examinations of Weld Joints (a) Full Radiography. The following welded joints shall be examined radiographically for their full length …. (1) all butt welds in the shell and heads of vessels used to contain lethal substances [see UW-2(a)]; * Remember, UW-2(a) demands that in lethal service the welds be of Type 1 for Category A and must be of either Type1 or 2 for Categories B and C.

Type 2

Type 1

Lethal Service

Full Radiography

19

(a) Full Radiography. The following welded joints shall be examined radiographically for their full length …. (2) all butt welds in vessels in which the nominal thickness [ see (g) below] at the welded joint exceeds 1-1/2 in. (38mm), or exceeds the lesser thicknesses prescribed in UCS-57…. * This paragraph is on the examination. (g) For radiographic and ultrasonic examination of butt welds, the definition of nominal thickness at the welded joint under consideration shall be the nominal thickness of the thinner of the two parts joined. Nominal thickness is defined in 3-2. (c) nominal thickness – …….For plate material, the nominal thickness shall be, at the Manufacturer’s option, either the thickness shown on the Material Test Report {or material Certificate of Compliance [UG-93(a)(1)]} before forming, or the measured thickness of the plate at the joint or location under consideration. * Information only this is not on the exam. (a) Full Radiography. The following welded joints shall be examined radiographically for their full length …. (2) all butt welds in vessels in which the nominal thickness [see (g) below] at the welded joint exceeds 1-1/2 in. (38 mm), or exceeds the lesser thicknesses prescribed in UCS-57, UNF-57, UHA-33, UCL-35, or UCL-36 for the materials covered therein, or as otherwise prescribed in UHT-57, ULW-51, ULW-52(d), ULW-54, or ULT-57; however, except as required by UHT-57(a), Categories B and C butt welds in nozzles and communicating chambers that neither exceed NPS10 nor 1-1/8 in. (29 mm) wall thickness do not require any radiographic examination; * If none of the rules in the paragraphs above apply then use the default thickness of 1-1/2”. This means; If the material of construction is not one of those referenced UW-11(a)(2) then the default value for the thinner thickness exceeded becomes 1-1/2”. Since the API 510 examination is restricted to UCS materials (carbon and low alloy steels) this rule will be demonstrated using a Carbon Steel that is classified as a P-Number 1.

20

UCS-57 From paragraph UCS-57: In addition to the requirements of UW-11, complete radiographic examination is required for each butt welded joint at which the thinner of the plate or vessel wall thicknesses at the welded joint exceeds the thickness limit above which full radiography is required in Table UCS-57.

Further Explained: For P No.1 materials the thinner of the two must exceed 1.25”. Therefore the girth weld at the 1.25 to 1.5” joint and all above it are exempt.

Carbon Steel P No.1 when the thinner of the two exceeds 1-¼"

t = 1.25

t = 1.25 t = 1.5"

t = 1.5" Full RT

t = 1.75"

21

UW-11 Continued (3) all butt welds in the shell and heads of unfired steam boilers ………Steam Boilers are NOT on the Exam. (4) all butt welds in nozzles, communicating chambers, etc., attached to vessel sections or heads that are required to be fully radiographed under (1) or (3) above; however, .....Categories B and C butt welds in nozzles and communicating chambers that **neither exceed NPS 10 (DNS 250) nor 1-1/8 in. (29mm) wall thickness do not require any radiographic examination; **

This only applies to circumferential welds in small (NPS 10 / 1-1/8” thick.) nozzles and chambers. Longitudinal seams are not exempted by this rule. Cat. A long seam RT req.

Weld Neck Flange Cat. C .75" thick NPS 6" No RT

Full RT for Lethal or Thickness 1-1/8" thick NPS 10" Weld Neck Flange Cat. C No RT NPS 12" Nozzle and Weld Neck Flange. Cat. C RT. Req.

Now for the hardest rule to understand! (5) all Category A and D butt welds in vessel sections and heads where the design of the joint or part is based on a joint efficiency permitted by UW-12(a), in which case: (a) Category A and B welds connecting the vessel sections or heads shall be of Type No. (1) or Type No. (2) of Table UW-12; * Just means they must be radiographable. (b) Category B or C butt welds [but not including those in nozzles or communicating chambers except as required in (2) above] which intersect the Category A butt welds in vessel sections or heads or connect seamless vessel sections or heads shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements for spot radiography in accordance with UW-52.

22

* This paragraph is only mandatory when it is desired by the designer to use the highest joint efficiency possible for calculations of thickness required or pressure allowed. It is a choice the designer makes when there are no mandatory requirements based on service or material as found in UW-11 (a) (1)*Lethal Service, (2)*Thickness exceeded (6) all butt welds joined by… electrogas welding is not on the exam. (7) ultrasonic examination in accordance with UW- 53 may be substituted for radiography for the final closure seam of a pressure vessel if the construction of the vessel does not permit interpretable radiographs in accordance with Code requirements. The absence of suitable radiographic equipment shall not be justification for such substitution. (8) exemptions from radiographic examination for certain welds in nozzles and communicating chambers as described in (2), (4), and (5) above take precedence over the radiographic requirements of Subsection C of this Division. Note: This means that even though P-No. 5 for example requires RT in all thicknesses the small/thin nozzles are exempt. (b) Spot Radiography. Except as required in (a)(5)(b) above, butt welded joints made in accordance with Type No. (1) or (2) of Table UW-12 which are not required to be fully radiographed by (a) above, may be examined by spot radiography. Spot radiography shall be in accordance with UW-52. * If full RT is not mandatory Spot Radiography is done because the designers chose it. If spot radiography is specified for the entire vessel, radiographic examination is not required of Category B and C butt welds in nozzles and communicating chambers that exceed neither NPS 10 nor 1-1/8 in. wall thickness (c) No Radiography. Except as required in (a) above, no radiographic examination of welded joints is required when the vessel or vessel part is designed for external pressure only, or when the joint design complies with UW-12(c). *

The designer can choose not to do RT if there is no mandatory requirement such as lethal, thickness, or the desire for a higher joint E.

Before starting shell and head calculations let’s have a look at the types of welds and the weld joint efficiencies that apply based on the amount of radiography applied. These E values are found on Table UW-12 of Section VIII Division 1. •

The following is a simplification for the API 510 Exam; it does not reflect all of the possible combinations of radiography, weld types and the resulting joint efficiencies

23

UW-12 Joint Efficiencies Table UW-12 gives the joint efficiencies E to be used in the formulas of this Division for joints completed by an arc or gas welding process. Except as required by UW-11(a)(5), a joint efficiency depends only on the type of joint and on the degree of examination of the joint and does not depend on the degree of examination of any other joint. (a) value of E not greater than that given in column (a)* of Table UW-12 shall be used in the design calculations for fully radiographed butt joints [seeUW-11(a)], except that when the requirements of UW-11(a)(5) are not met, a value of E not greater than that given in column (b) of Table UW12 shall be used. * Known as Full Radiography So now we are sent back to UW-11(a)(5)……. UW-11(a)(5) all Category A and D butt welds in vessel sections and heads where the design of the joint or part is based on a joint efficiency permitted by UW -12(a), in which case: (a) Category A and B welds connecting the vessel sections or heads shall be of Type No. (1) or Type No. (2) of Table UW-12; * (simply means it can be radiographed) (b) Category B or C butt welds [but not including those in nozzles or communicating chambers except as required in (2) above *(excludes small/thin nozzles)] which intersect the Category A butt welds in vessel sections or heads or connect seamless vessel sections or heads shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements for spot radiography in accordance with UW-52. UW-11(a)(5) explained:

This rule is pointed toward Code manufacturers who buy parts from other “Code Shops” and basically assemble a vessel. The concern is as follows;

Code Shop A buys a rolled and welded shell from Code Shop B, Shop B fully radiographs the Type 1 weld and the shell part will be delivered to Shop A with a joint E of 1.0. which is essentially equal to a seamless shell. Code Shop A welds on two seamless formed heads. Unless Shop A performs at least Spot RT on the Category B welds connecting the heads to the shell there will have been no radiographic testing of Code Shop A’s welders. A graphical representation follows.

24

Example 1: The longitudinal seam weld is of Type 1. It has received Full RT at Code Shop B. Shop A has not performed the required Spot RT on the head to shell welds.

Fully Radiographed Type 1 by Shop B Heads welded on by Shop A . Without the spot RT as described in UW-11(a)(5)(b) the shell would be calculated at E= .85

Example 2: Now the Spot RT has been performed by Shop B. Therefore and E = 1.0 is allowed for the shell.

Fully Radiographed Type 1 by Shop B Heads welded on by Shop A . With the spot RT as described in UW-11(a)(5)(b) the shell would be calculated at E= 1.0

UW-11(a)(5)

So this means that Shop A cannot simply weld the heads, nozzles etc. and never do any radiographic testing of the Shop A welders. To make things consistent this rule applies even if the entire vessel is made by one Code Shop. So no matter what the circumstances this Spot RT must be performed to take a joint efficiency from Col. A of to Table UW-12 for seamed shell course.

25

Example 3: One last comment. On the shop floor these two shells both have the potential for a Joint E of 1.0 . You will see this again in UW-12(d) Seamless Shells and Heads.

Seamless Shell Course

Seamed Shell Course Type 1 Full RT

(b) A value of E not greater than that given in *column (b) of Table UW-12 shall be used in the design calculations for spot radiographed butt welded joints [see UW-11(b)]. * Known as Spot Radiography (c) A value of E not greater than that given in * column (c) of Table UW-12 shall be used in the design calculations for welded joints that are neither fully radiographed nor spot radiographed [see UW-11(c)]. * No Radiography Now let’s examine the first three Types listed on Table UW-12 and examine the joint types, the amount of radiography and the resulting Joint Efficiencies.

26

27

UG-116 Joint Efficiencies based on RT Marking Next we will discuss Nameplate RT markings and how to determine the joint E to be used in the thickness or pressure calculations to follow. These RT markings and their descriptions are found in paragraph UG116. We will now discuss these accompanied by graphical representations. "RT 1"

when all pressure retaining butt welds, other than B and C associated with nozzles and communicating chambers that neither exceed NPS 10 nor 1-1/8 inch thickness have been radiographically examined for their full length in a manner prescribed in UW 51, full radiography of the above exempted Category B and C butt welds if performed, may be recorded…...

RT 1

"RT 2"

Lethal

Shell and Heads E= 1.0

Complete vessel satisfies UW-11(a)(5) and UW- 11(a)(5)(b) has been applied. The spot RT rules of UW-52 must be applied to the spot RT and the Full RT rules of UW-51 to the long seams. So the 50’ increments apply and all welders in that increment must be examined by radiography.

RT 2

"RT 2"

MW-1

MW-1

Desire for E=1.0

Shell and Heads E= 1.0

Complete vessel satisfies UW-11(a)(5) and UW- 11(a)(5)(b) has been applied. This is the second Case of RT 2 resulting in E = 1.0, again the rules of UW-52 apply.

RT 2

Seamless Shell Seamless Heads Shell and Heads E= 1.0

28

"RT 3"

Complete vessel satisfies spot radiography of UW-11(b). The simplest example, one welding operator and only three radiographs in 122’ of weld. The following assumes Type 1 welds for all weld seams.

"RT 4"

When only part of the vessel satisfies any of the above. * Only part of the vessel has been radiographed due to a thickness limit being exceeded as listed in UCS 57 or the desire to use E = 1.0 .

The next consideration is the shells and heads of vessels which are considered seamless. The Efficiencies used to calculate these vessel parts are not found on Table UW-12 but are instead listed in paragraph UW-12(d). (d) Seamless vessel sections or heads shall be considered equivalent to welded parts of the same geometry in which all Category A welds are Type No. 1. For calculations involving circumferential stress in seamless vessel sections or for thickness of seamless heads, E=1.0 when the spot radiography requirements of UW-11(a)(5)(b) are met. E= 0.85 when the spot radiography requirements of UW-11(a)(5)(b) are not met, or when the Category A or B welds connecting seamless vessel sections or heads are Type No. 3, 4, 5, or 6 of Table UW-12. * Note this rule applies to the Code Shop A and B issue.

29

RT 2

Shell and Heads E= 1.0

MW-1

(d) Seamless vessel sections or heads shall be considered equivalent to welded parts of the same geometry in which all Category A welds are Type No. 1. For calculations involving circumferential stress in seamless vessel sections or for thickness of seamless heads, E=1.0 when the spot radiography requirements of UW-11(a)(5)(b) are met.

Seamless Shell Seamless Heads Shell and Heads E= 1.0 (d) Seamless vessel …………. E= 0.85 when the spot radiography requirements of UW-11(a)(5)(b) are not met, or when the Category A or B welds connecting seamless vessel sections or heads are Type No. 3, 4, 5, or 6 of Table UW-12. * Weld Type 3 to 6 can not be radiographed by Code rules.

Seamless Shell Seamless Heads Shell and Heads E= 0.85 (e) Welded pipe or tubing shall be treated in the same manner as seamless, but with allowable tensile stress taken from the welded product values of the stress tables, and the requirements of UW-12(d) applied. * If the spot RT is applied use E = 1.0, if not E = 0.85

Seamed Pipe Shell Seamless Heads

30

UW-12 Joint Efficiencies For the purposes of choosing joint efficiencies when doing vessel section or head calculations on the API 510 Examination the following can be said. RT 1 Full Use 1.0 if joints are of Type 1 or 0.90 if Type 2 RT 2 Case 1: Use 1.0 with Seamless Heads and Shells Case 2: Seamed Shells/Seamless Heads •

Shells Use 1.0 if joints are Type 1or if Type 2 Use 0.90

•

Use 1.0 for seamless heads RT 3

Use 0.85 if Joints are of Type 1 or 0.80 if of Type 2 Use 0.85 for Seamless heads RT 4 * Special case of selective radiography * Use Table UW-12 based on Joint Type and RT described in the exam question No RT Go to Table UW-12 and look up the E to be used for the type of weld under consideration. Case1: Type 1 Use 0.70 Case 2: Type 2 Use 0.65 Seamless heads use 0.85 Remember that there only two (2) joint efficiencies possible for Seamless Shell and Seamless Heads they are; 1.0 or 0.85 1.0 When the rules of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have been applied (UW-52 Spot RT applied). 0.85 When the rules have not been applied (UW-52 Spot RT not applied). DO NOT GO TO TABLE UW-12 FOR THE E TO USE IN SEAMLESS HEADS OR SEAMLESS SHELLS

31

Section 2 Head and Shell Calculations

Lesson 2 Head and Shell Calculations Objectives Learn to Calculate: •

The required thickness of a cylindrical shell based on circumferential stress given a pressure (UG-27(c)(1).

•

The vessel part Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) for a cylindrical shell based on circumferential stress given a metal thickness (UG-27(c)(1).

•

The required thickness of a head (ellipsoidal, torispherical and hemispherical) given a pressure. (UG-32 (d), (e),& (f).

•

The vessel part MAWP for a head (ellipsoidal, torispherical and hemispherical) given a metal thickness using paragraphs UG-32 (d), (e),& (f).

•

Whether a head (ellipsoidal, torispherical or hemispherical) meets Code requirements given pressure and metal thickness UG 32(d), (e), and (f).

In any of the above you must also be able to: •

Compensate for the corrosion allowance: add or subtract based on requirements of the exam problem. The Appendix 1* formula for cylinders, which is based on outside diameter, can be used.

•

* The Appendix 1 formulas for non-standard heads will not be required. Overview

This lesson will start with straight forward new construction calculations from Section VIII Div.1 for internal dimension (I.D.) and progress on to consider; •

Corrosion Allowances

•

Outside dimension calculation of cylindrical shells.*

•

O.D. calculations will come from Appendix 1 formula 1-1 this is only issue from Appendix 1 on the exam.

33

UG-27 Thickness of Shells under Internal Pressure Here we find the formulae and definitions for calculation of cylindrical shells under internal pressure. The paragraph begins as follows; (a) The thickness of shells under internal pressure shall be not less than that computed by the following formulas. In addition, provision shall be made for any of the other loadings listed in UG22, when such loadings are expected…… The provided thickness of shells shall also meet UG16 * (addresses minimum thickness allowed). (b) The symbols defined below are used in the formulas of this paragraph. t = minimum required thickness of shell, in. P = internal design pressure (see UG-21), psi R = inside radius of the shell course under consideration S = maximum allowable stress value, psi E = joint efficiency for, or the efficiency of, appropriate joint in cylindrical or spherical shells, or efficiency of ligaments are… not on the exam. For welded vessels, use the efficiency specified in UW-12. For ligaments between openings, …….are not on the exam. (c) Cylindrical Shells. The minimum thickness or maximum allowable working pressure of cylindrical shells shall be the greater thickness or lesser pressure as given by (1) or (2) below. (1) Circumferential Stress Longitudinal Joints. When the thickness does not exceed one-half of the inside radius, or P does not exceed 0.385SE, the following formulas shall apply: *(The above is a test to see if these formulae apply, they always do on this examination) With the exception of Appendix 1 formulae, all cylindrical shell calculations on the exam will use one of these two formulae! * Highlight these two!

t=

PR SE - 0.6 P

OR

P=

SEt R + 0.6 t

(2) Longitudinal Stress (Circumferential Joints). When the thickness does not exceed one-half of the inside radius, or P does not exceed 1.25SE, the following formulas shall apply: These formulas are not used on the exam. * DO NOT USE or highlight them!

t=

PR 2SE - 0.2 P

Not on the Exam

34

P=

2SEt R + 0.2 t

Foot Note 14 Formulas in terms of the outside radius and for thicknesses and pressures beyond the limits fixed in this paragraph are given in 1-1 to 1-3. Of Appendix 1, only the first two shell formulas from paragraph 1-1 (a) (1) are on the Body of Knowledge! Let’s have a look at those. Appendix 1 Supplementary Design Formulas 1-1

THICKNESS OF CYLINDRICAL AND SPHERICAL SHELLS (a) The following formulas, in terms of the outside radius, are equivalent to and may be used instead of those given in UG-27 (c) and (d). (1) For cylindrical shells (circumferential stress),

t=

PRo SE + 0.4 P

P=

OR

SEt Ro - 0.4 t

(1)

(2) Longitudinal stress NOT ON EXAM cross out. Example: Given a cylindrical shell with the following variables, solve for the MAWP of the cylinder using both formulas. P=?

* The question mark defines what is being solved for.

t = 0.500" S = 15,000 psi E = 1.0 R = 18.0“ and Routside = 18.5"

UG - 27(c)(1) P =

SEt 15,000 x 1.0 x0.500 7500 = = = 409.8 psi R + 0.6t 18.0 + (0.6 x 0.500) 18.3

App 1 (1 - 1) P =

SEt 15,000 x 1.0 x 0.500 7500 = = = 409.8 psi Ro - 0.4t 18.5 - (0.4 x 0.500) 18.3

35

Which formula you use is determined by how the question is asked. Example 1: Internal Formula A vessel shell has corroded to an inside radius of 23.58” its working pressure is 500 psi and its stress allowed is 17,500 psi. What is the required thickness? Other terms sometimes used: Corroded internally, found to have an inside diameter/radius, etc. In these cases we must use the inside formula of UG-27 Example 2: External Formula A vessel shell has corroded to an outside diameter of 23.58” its working pressure is 500 psi and stress allowed is…..what is the required thickness? Other terms sometimes used: found externally corroded, attacked by corrosion under insulation (CUI) etc. Here we would have to use the formula of Appendix 1. •

You can use either formula in some situations.

Example 3: Internal Formula or External Formula A vessel shell has corroded to an inside radius of 23.58 ” its working pressure is 500 psi and its stress allowed is ….its original thickness was .500” and the original inside radius was 24.0 ” ** for inside calculations use R = 23.58 (actual) To use the outside formula we can add the original thickness to the original inside radius. 24” + .500 = 24.5” = Ro Original radius outside Now we can use the formula of Appendix 1-1 if we chose to. •

Also there is the situation where you are given only the Outside Dimension (O.D.) and asked to solve for the thickness required or maximum allowable working pressure.

Example 4:

External Formula for Thickness

A vessel shell has an outside radius of 24.0 ” its working pressure is 500 psi and its stress allowed is 15,000 psi. The joint efficiency, E = 1.0. The shell has corroded internally to a thickness of 0.343”. What is its present Maximum Allowable Working Pressure? Here you must use the O.D. Formula since you cannot determine the present internal corroded radius, not having the original thickness you cannot determine the original I.D.!

36

Here is an example of working a problem using both inside and outside dimensions having all the information needed. A cylindrical shell has been found to have a minimum thickness of .353". Its original thickness was .375“ with an original inside radius of 12.0”. What is its present MAWP ? Pulling the information from the stated problem, we have: P = 300 psi t = .353" S = 13,800 psi E = .85 R = 12.0" + (.375-.353) = 12.022 corroded inside radius Ro= 12.0" + 0.375 (orig. t) =12.375” original outside radius Here is a graphical representation of the problem: Which formula?

R inside corroded = 12 + (0.375 – 0.353) = 12.022”

t Corroded = 0.353"

t Orig. = 0.375"

R outside = 12.0" + 0.375 (orig. t) = 12.375”

You Choose! Radius Inside for MAWP using UG-27(c)(1). UG - 27(c)(1) P =

13,800 x .85 x .353 4140.69 SEt = = 338.46 psi = R + 0.6t 12.022 + (0.6 x .353) 12.2338

Radius Outside for MAWP using App: 1 (1-1). App 1 (1 - 1) P =

SEt 13,800 x .85 x .353 4140.69 = = = 338.46 psi Ro - 0.4t 12.375 - (0.4 x .353) 12.2338

37

Let's do a simple internal shell calculation now. We will use a shell which is seamless. You may find the following approach helpful in keeping track of the data. As the problems become more difficult, it becomes harder to track the variables if you are not organized. •

Make a simple sketch of the shell and label its dimensions.

•

List what is required to know. We will call these givens.

•

State the code paragraph that applies, i.e., UG-27, etc.

Use this approach for all calculations. Givens:

Sketch

t = I.D. ?

P= R=

t=?

S= E=

P= Code Paragraph UG-27 (c) (1)

38

SEt R + 0.6 t

Problem # 1 Find the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) of a 12 inch inside diameter shell. This shell is seamless and is stamped RT 2. It has an allowable stress value of 16,600 psi and the wall thickness is .406”. No corrosion is expected. SKETCH

R = 6.0"

I.D. 12.0"

t = .406"

Givens: Plug in from the values given in the question! P =? t = .406 R = D/2 = 12/2 = 6.0” this formula uses the Radius. S = 16,600 psi E = 1.0 per UW-12(d) Seamless shells and heads From UG-27 (c) (1) Circumferential Stress

P= P=

SEt R + 0.6 t

16,600 x 1.0 x.406 6739.6 = = 1079.44 psi (6.0 ) + ( 0.6 x .406) 6.2436

39

As can be seen the calculations are simple, it is more a matter of deciding on the correct formula to use, inside or outside, and transferring the givens accurately to the formula. Once again use the approach; Givens:

SKETCH

P= t= ect. About rounding answers. In the ASME Code and for the exam you must round DOWN for pressure allowed so in our solution below we would round down to 1079 psi. Even if our solution had been 1079.999 we cannot round to 1080, we still round down to 1079 psi. This is the conservative approach taken by the Codes in general and of course is different for the normal rules of rounding. Problem # 2 Find the minimum required thickness of a cylindrical shell designed for a working pressure of 100 psi. The shell's inside radius is 2'-0". The longitudinal joint is type 1 (table UW-12) and no radiography was performed. The shell is made of carbon steel rolled plate with an allowable stress of 15,000 psi. SKETCH

Type 1 Category A No RT

t=?

Givens: t=? P = 100 psi R = 24" S = 15000 E = .70 ( From Table UW-12 column C) From UG-27 (c) (1) Circumferential Stress

t=

t=

PR SE - 0.6 P

100 x 24 2400 = = .2298 " (15,000 x .70 ) - (0.6 x 100) 10440

When rounding thickness required we must round up. The most conservative thing to do. So our example below would round to .230”. Even it had been .2291 we would still round up to .230”.

40

We have now calculated the pressure allowed on a seamless shell in Problem #1 and have calculated the thickness required of a seamed shell in Problem #2. Now for one more example. Problem # 3 Determine the minimum required thickness of a cylindrical shell designed for an internal pressure of 50 psi, no corrosion is expected. The shell’s inside diameter is 10’-0”. The shell’s Category A and B, Type 1 welds have been fully radiographed. The material’s stress allowable is 17,500 psi. The vessel will be stamped RT 1. Long Joint (Circumferential Stress) SKETCH:

I.D. 10'- 0"

t=?

Type 1 Category A&B Full RT

Givens: t=? P = 50 R = 10’ x 12” = 120”/2 = 60" S = 17500 E = 1.0 (RT 1) From UG-27 (c) (1)

t=

50 x 60 3000 = = .1717 " rounds to .172" (17,500 x 1.0 ) - (0.6 x 50) 17470

41

You are now familiar with the basic cylindrical shell formula from UG-27. However that formula in its published form is only useful for the calculation of vessel shells that are designed without a corrosion allowance. Usually during design a corrosion allowance will be given to vessel part. Example: A vessel is being designed for a specific volume of water. The designer determines the optimum inside diameter and length of the vessel to obtain that volume. The engineer set the inside diameter at 48” so it must be constructed with that inside diameter, resulting in an inside radius of 24” to be used in the calculation. In the design calculation the engineer adds the corrosion allowance to the radius. The basic formula of UG-27 would be modified to be;

t=

P (R + c .a .) SE - 0.6 P

or

P=

SEt (R + c.a) + 0.6 t

Inside diameter = 48.0” Inside radius = 24.0” c.a. = 1/8” = 0.125” Inside radius used in calculations = 24.0 + 0.125 = 24.125” resulting in the following; P=

SEt (24 + 0.125) + 0.6 t

The vessel shell would be constructed of the required calculated thickness and then rolled to an inside radius of 24”, it retirement radius would be 24.125” This is no different from what occurs during the evaluation of an in service vessel that has corroded. However here we use actual measurements. Suppose the vessel shell above was built with a thickness of 0.500” and rolled to the 24.0” inside radius. Corrosion has occurred and the new minimum wall thickness is 0.450”. To calculate we would use a radius of 24.0 + (0.500 – 0.450) or 24.050”. This would leave a remaining corrosion allowance of .125 -.050 = .075”

42

UG-32 Internal Pressure On Formed Heads There are three types of calculations for formed heads listed in the Body of Knowledge: Ellipsoidal, Torispherical and Hemispherical. A sketch and the formulae for thickness of each kind are below.

t=

PD 2SE - 0.2 P

t=

0.885PL SE - 0.1P

t=

PL 2SE - 0.2P

(a) The required thickness at the thinnest point after forming of ellipsoidal, torispherical, hemispherical, conical, and toriconical (not on exam) heads under pressure on the concave side (plus heads) shall be computed……. (b) The thickness of an unstayed ellipsoidal or torispherical head shall in no case be less than….this is a test to see if you should use this formula or the ones given in Appendix 1. Not on Exam! (c) The symbols defined below are used in the formulas of this paragraph: t = minimum required thickness of head after forming, in. (mm) P = internal design pressure (see UG-21), psi (kPa) D = inside diameter of the head skirt; or inside length of the major axis of an ellipsoidal head; in. (mm) S = maximum allowable stress value in tension. E = lowest efficiency of any joint in the head; for hemispherical heads this includes head-toshell joint; for welded vessels, use the efficiency specified in UW-12 L = inside spherical or crown radius, in. (mm) There are 5 formed heads listed in UG-32. You will be responsible for the calculations of these 3 only;

43

Hemispherical, Ellipsoidal and, Torispherical.Heads The next series of slides are example calculations of all three types for thickness required. These calculations will use the exact same conditions for service, stress allowed, Joint E, dimensions, and pressure. •

With all things being equal, which do you suspect will be the thinnest allowed?

•

Which do you think will be the thickest required?

•

Which is in the middle?

Examples: Givens: The same pressure, stress and, dimension values will be used for all heads. Let’s determine which type of head will be the thickest required and which will be the thinnest allowed. Given: P = 100 psi S = 17500 PSI E = .85 for spot RT of Hemi-head joint to shell E = 1.0 for seamless heads ( Ellipsoidal and Torispherical ) L = 48" for the inside spherical radius for the hemi-head L = 96" for the inside crown radius of the torispherical head D = 96" inside diameter of the ellipsoidal t = ? Required wall thickness, inches Problem # 1 Given the above data find the required thickness of a seamless ellipsoidal head.

From UG-32 (d) t=

PD 2SE - 0.2 P

t=

100 x 96 9600 = .2744 " (2 x 17,500 x 1.0) - (0.2 x 100) 34980

44

Problem # 2 Using the same data, calculate the required thickness of a hemispherical head.

From UG-32 (f) PL t= 2SE - 0.2P

t=

100 x 48 4800 = = 0.1614 " ( 2 x 17,500 x 0.85) − (0.2 x 100) 29730

Problem # 3 Determine the required t of this torispherical head. (These are also called ASME flanged and dished heads, by the way).

From UG-32(e)

t=

0.885PL SE - 0.1P

t=

0.885 x 100 x 96 8496 = = .4857 " (17,500 x 1.0) - (0.1 x 100) 17490

So we have from thickest to thinnest, all things equal: Torispherical = .4857” (Rounds to .486”) Ellipsoidal = .2744 (Rounds up to .275”) Hemispherical = .1614 (Rounds to .162”) There have been several exams where the question was asked, “Which is required to be thickest” or “Which can be the thinnest” Remember this.

One last important comment: Hemispherical heads while they can be formed seamless are not considered seamless heads by Section VIII. As mentioned previously they essentially form a Category A seam between the head and the other part. The spot RT of UW-12(d) does not apply to the Joint E used to calculate a Hemispherical head. They are never seamless; their Joint E comes from Table UW-12 based on the Type of weld and the extent of Radiography applied. * Remember This.*

45

Section 3 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure

Lesson 3 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure UG-98 (a) The maximum allowable working pressure for a vessel is the maximum pressure permissible at the top of the vessel in its normal operating position at the designated coincident temperature specified for that pressure. It is the least of the values found for maximum allowable working pressure for any of the essential parts of the vessel by the principles given in (b) below, and adjusted for any difference in static head that may exist between the part considered and the top of the vessel (See 32). (b) The maximum allowable working pressure for a vessel part is the maximum internal or external pressure, including the static head thereon, as determined by the rules and formulas in this Division, together with the effect of any combination of loadings listed in UG-22 which are likely to occur, for the designated coincident temperature, excluding any metal thickness specified as corrosion allowance. (c) Maximum allowable working pressure may be determined for more than one designated operating temperature, using for each temperature the applicable allowable stress value. In the Code there are two types of Maximum Allowable Working Pressures (MAWP). One is for the vessel itself, the one most think of and refer to all the time. The other is the one for each part of a vessel referred to in UG-98 as the part MAWP. Think of it in this way: a vessel has a shell, heads, chambers… etc., and pressure allowed or thickness required calculations must be performed for each one to determine the MAWP of the vessel. When doing these calculations, you cannot take credit for any extra thickness designed into the vessel as a corrosion allowance. The weakest of the vessels parts, considering other loadings such as the static head of the contents, weight of insulation, wind, etc., will determine the MAWP of the entire vessel. It is the weakest link in the chain…The pressure referred to here can be internal or external. The MAWP of a vessel is the pressure allowed in a vessel at its top in its normal operating position and at its maximum operating temperature. The MAWP can be determined for more than one designated operating temperature, using for each temperature the applicable allowable stress value.

47

Section 4 Hydrostatic Head Pressure

Lesson 4 Hydrostatic Head Pressure

Overview What is hydrostatic head pressure? Let’s examine the words to better understand the meaning of hydrostatic. • Hydro meaning liquid • Static meaning unchanging. • Pressure is a force exerted over an area. Which of leads us to the following; It is a pressure that is generated by the weight of the liquid due to gravity. The taller the height of a liquid column the greater the force, which is expressed as pounds per square inch (psi) for our purposes. The Hydro (liquid) of interest on the exam is water, since it is the primary liquid we use for Hydrostatic testing. Other liquids can be and are used. The hydrostatic head of water is part of our everyday lives. For example the water tower that supplies your home uses the principle of “Hydrostatic Head” or gravity to push the water into your home and out of your faucets. Let’s have a look at a graphic of a water tower that will detail this principle. Hydrostatic Head of a Water Tower 140’ x 0.433 = 60.6 psig and 100’ x 0.433 = 43.3

49

Hydrostatic Head of Water Basic Principle The hydrostatic head of water is equal to 0.433 psi per vertical foot above the point where the pressure will measured. For example the hydrostatic head of water at a point in a vessel with 10 feet of water above it is calculated by multiplying 10 x 0.433 psi. 10 x 0.433 = 4.33 psi The 4.33 psi is being exerted totally by the weight of the water. No other external pressure having been applied. If an external source of pressure is applied it would be added to the hydrostatic head pressure of the water at any given point in the vessel, more on this later. Now for a pressure vessel, no external pressure, filled with water only. 0 psi at top, the bottom is 100 x 0.433 = 43.3 psi 100 psi

0 psi

100 Feet

100 Feet

143.3 psi

43.3 psi

External pressure of 100 psi is now applied resulting in a gage pressure at the bottom of 143.3 psi. The 43.3 psi is static, never changing. From these simple water tower and pressure vessel examples the following can be understood and applied to a pressure vessel. For a pressure vessel the MAWP is always measured at the top in its normal operating position. Here are the issues on the exam that must be understood to work a H.H. problem. Case 1: How do you determine hydrostatic head based on a given elevation? Case 2: When do you add the hydrostatic head pressure in vessel calculations? Case 3: When do you subtract the hydrostatic head pressure in vessel calculations? Case 1: To determine hydrostatic head based on an elevation from a stated problem it must be understood that elevations are normally taken from the ground level to a vessel’s very top. You must subtract the Given elevation from the Total elevation to determine vertical feet of hydrostatic head above the given elevation.

50

Example: A vessel has an elevation of 18 feet and is mounted on a 3 foot base. What is the hydrostatic head pressure of water at the 11 foot elevation which is located at the bottom of the top shell course? Remember it is the number of vertical feet above the given elevation in question which causes the hydrostatic head at that point. To find the hydrostatic head you must subtract the elevation of the Given point from the Total elevation given for the vessel. 18' feet total -11' desired point 7' total hydrostatic head Hydrostatic head pressure at 11' elevation is:7 x 0.433psi = 3.03 psi

=

Case 2:

Hydrostatic head at a point in a vessel must be added to the pressure used (normally vessel MAWP) when calculating the required thickness of the vessel component at that elevation.

Example:

Determine the required thickness of the shell course in Case 1. The vessel's MAWP (Always measured at the top in the normal operating position) is 100 psi. The following variables apply:

Givens: t = ? Circumferential stress from UG-27(c)(1) P = 100 psi + Hydrostatic Head S = 15,000 psi E = 1.0 R = 20" Since the bottom of this shell course is at the 11 foot elevation the pressure it will see is 100 psi + the hydrostatic head. 100 + 3.03 = 103.03 psi

51

t=

Also our basic formula becomes;

t=

( P + H . H .) R SE - 0.6( P + H . H .)

103.03 x 20 2060.6 = = .1379 (15,000 x1.0) x (0.6 x103.3) 14938.18

52

Case 3

You must subtract hydrostatic head pressure when determining the MAWP of a vessel. If given a vessel of multiple parts and the MAWP for each of the parts, the MAWP of the entire vessel is determined by subtracting the hydrostatic head pressure at the bottom of each part to find the part which limits the MAWP of the vessel.

Example: A vessel has an elevation of 40 feet including a 4 foot base. The engineer has calculated the following part’s MAWP to the bottom of each part based on each part's minimum thickness and corroded diameter. Determine the MAWP of the vessel as measured at the top.

Calculated Part MAWP at the bottom of: Top Shell Course 28' Elev. 406.5 psi Middle Shell Course 16.5' Elev. 410.3 psi Bottom Shell Course 4' Elev. 422.8 psi Bottom of top shell course: 40.0' elev. -28.0' elev. 12.0' of hydrostatic head 12' x 0.433 psi = 5.196 psi of Static

Bottom of the middle shell course: 40.0' elev. -16.5' elev. 23.5' of hydrostatic head 23.5' x 0.433 psi = 10.175 psi of Hydrostatic HeadBottom of bottom shell course:

40.0' elev. -4.0' elev. 36.0' of hydrostatic head 36' x 0.433 psi = 15.588 psi of Hydrostatic Head

53

The final step in determining the MAWP of the vessel at its top is to subtract the hydrostatic head of water from each of the calculated Part MAWP. The lowest pressure will be the maximum gauge pressure permitted at the top of the vessel. Bottom of top shell course 406.5 - 5.196 = 401.3 psi Bottom of mid shell course 410.3 - 10.175 = 400.125 psi Bottom of btm. shell course 422.8 - 15.588 = 407.212 psi Therefore the bottom of the middle shell course’s MAWP limits the pressure at the top and, determines the MAWP of the vessel.

The MAWP of the vessel is 400.125 psi

One thing to remember is this pressure is static. In our example the if the applied external pressure at the top were raised above 400.125 psi, then down at the 16.5’ elevation the gage would exceed that shell course’s MAWP of 410.3.

54

One last example using a vessel which is horizontal, just to reinforce the concept that it is the Vertical Height that must be considered. The 6.928 psi total H.H. must be considered at the bottom when calculating the sump head.

3'

10'

MW-1

3'

16 feet

Total 16' x 0.433 psi = 6.928 psi H.H. Depth of a Hemispherical and Ellipsoidal heads Hydrostatic Head of Water One final thing the determination of H.H. for two formed heads, Hemispherical and Ellipsoidal. Hemispherical Head For this example we will use a hemispherical head that has an inside diameter of 48 inches which means it has a radius of 24 inches. The radius is the depth of the hemispherical head

55

Ellipsoidal Head An ellipsoidal head's I. D. will be the same as the shell. The inside diameter of an ellipsoidal head is also its major axis. This fact is the basis of finding the depth of a 2 to 1 ellipsoidal head. Notice that we are strictly talking about 2 to 1 ellipsoidal heads. The 2 to 1 refers to the ratio of the Major Axis to the Minor Axis of an ellipse which is used to form the head

Of course only half of the Minor Axis is used for the head. Now add the 2 inch flange to the dish.

Therefore, our 2 to 1 Ellipsoidal head has a depth of 14 inches. Hint: To find the depth of a 2 to 1 ellipsoidal head divide the major axis by 4. In our example 48/4 = 12 then add the 2” flange.

Ellipsoidal Converting to feet: 18" divided by 12 = 1.5' x 0.433 psi = 0.6495 psi Hemispherical Converting to feet. 32" divided by 12 = 2.666' x 0.433 psi = 1.1543 psi

56

Adding H.H. and Corrosion wall loss in Calculations Increasing internal or decreasing external dimensions due to corrosion was introduced in Lesson 2, “Shell and Head Calculations”. In actual practice Hydrostatic Head would also need to be considered. The following demonstrates the principals involved. Example: A vertical vessel shell course has an MAWP of 200 psi, and an allowable stress of 14,800 psi. The inside radius is 84”. The nameplate is stamped RT1. The shell has corroded down to 1.28 inches. Its original t was 1.375". There exists 21.9964 psi H.H. at the bottom of the shell course. What is its current calculated minimum thickness of this shell course in accordance with rules of Section VIII Division 1 considering both corrosion and hydrostatic head?

200 psi

50.8 feet

50.8 x .433 = 21.99 round up = 22 psi t req. = ?" Corroded Inside Radius 84 + wall loss

57

Basic Formula: UG-27 (c) (1)

t=

PR SE - 0.6 P

Modified to consider Hydrostatic Head and increased radius due to internal corrosion. Givens:

(P + H.H.) (R + corrosion) SE - 0.6 (P + H.H.)

t =? P = 200 S = 14,800 psi E = 1.0 RT 1 R = 84” = 84” + (1.375-1.28) = 84.095” H.H..= 21.9964 rounded to 22 psi

t=

(200 + 22) (84 + .095) (222) (84.095) = = (14,800)(1.0) - (0.6) (200 + 22) (14,800)(1.0) - (0.6) (222)

18669.09 18669.09 = = 1.273" 14,800 - 133.2 14,666.8 Its present thickness is 1.28” and its minimum calculated thickness is 1.273, very close to repair or retire.

58

Section 5 Hydrostatic, Pneumatic Tests

Lesson 5 Hydrostatic, Pneumatic Tests UG-99 Standard Hydrostatic Test (a) A hydrostatic test shall be conducted on all vessels after: (1) all fabrication has been completed, except for operations which could not be performed prior to the test such as weld end preparation…. (2) all examinations have been performed, except those required after the test…... (b) Except as otherwise permitted in (a) above and 27-3, vessels designed for internal pressure shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the vessel is at least equal to 1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure to be marked on the vessel multiplied by the lowest ratio (for the materials of which the vessel is constructed) of the stress value S for the test temperature on the vessel to the stress value S for the design temperature…Stress at Test TempStress at Design Temp (c) A hydrostatic test based on a calculated pressure may be used by agreement between the user and the manufacturer… A New and Cold Test relates to a statement in API 510. (d) The requirements of (b) above represent the minimum standard hydrostatic test pressure required by this Division…(g) Following the application of the hydrostatic test pressure, an inspection shall be made of all joints and connections. This inspection shall be made at a pressure not less than the test pressure divided by 1.3. Except for leakage that might occur at temporary test closures for those openings intended for welded connections, leakage is not allowed at the time of the required visual inspection…. The visual inspection of joints and connections for leaks at the test pressure divided by 1.3 may be waived provided: (1) a suitable gas leak test is applied;(2) substitution of the gas leak test is by agreement reached between Manufacturer and Inspector;(3) all welded seams which will be hidden by assembly be given a visual examination for workmanship prior to assembly;(4) the vessel will not contain a “lethal” substance.(h) Any non-hazardous liquid at any temperature may be used for the hydrostatic test if below its boiling point. Combustible liquids having a flash point less than 110°F, such as petroleum distillates, may be used… It is recommended that the metal temperature during hydrostatic test be maintained at least 30°F above the minimum design metal temperature, but need not exceed 120°F, to minimize the risk of brittle fracture. API 510 has a different rule for this, it recommends that the temperature be 10°F above for 2” (50mm) thickness and under and 30°F above for over 2 inches (50mm). Footnote Caution: A small liquid relief valve set to 1-1/3 times the test pressure is recommended for the pressure test system in case a vessel, while under test, is likely to be warmed up materially with personnel absent. (i)Vents shall be provided at all high points of the vessel in the position in which it is to be tested to purge possible air pockets… (j) Before applying pressure, the test equipment shall be examined to see that it is tight and that all low pressure filling lines and other appurtenances…(k) Vessels, except for those in lethal service, may be painted or otherwise coated either internally or externally, and may be lined internally, prior to the pressure test. However, the user is cautioned that such painting / coating / lining may mask leaks that would otherwise have been detected during the pressure test.

59

API 510 Hydrostatic Test Procedures 1. If the test is required it shall be conducted after welded repairs. 2. The test pressure must at least be1.3 times the MAWP or whatever the original design Code specified i.e. 1.5. 3. The test pressure shall be adjusted for lowest ratio of stresses. 4. Any non-hazardous fluid may be used if below its boiling point. 5. It is recommended that the metal temperature during hydro test be maintained at least 10 °F above MDMT for vessels 2” (51mm) and less and 30 °F above for vessels over 2” (51mm) to minimize the risk of brittle fracture. 6. Following the application of hydro pressure a visual inspection shall be performed at no less than the test pressure divided by 1.3 or whatever was originally used. Problem: Calculate the required hydro test pressure for a vessel using

the following conditions:

Material Carbon Steel Design Temp. 700 °F Test Temp 85 °F MAWP 350 psi Step 1 Determine the ratio of stresses for the test and design temperatures. (a) From Table 1A Section II Part D. Stress allowed at 700 °F = 15,500 psi Stress allowed at 85 °F = 16,300 psi b) Per UG-99 the ratio equals

Stress at Test Temp. Stress at Design Temp.

Step 2 UG-99(b) Test pressure equals 1.3 x MAWP x ratio 1.3 x 350 psi x 1.05 = 477.75 psi at the top of the vessel

60

UW-50 NDE of Welds for Pneumatically Tested Vessels Look at the reference next to UG-100 (See UW-50) This is what is referred to as a parenthetical reference in the ASME Codes. You must read these to see what modifiers the Code has placed on subject paragraph. On welded pressure vessels to be pneumatically tested in accordance with UG-100, the full length of the following welds shall be examined for the purpose of detecting cracks: (a) all welds around openings;(b) all attachment welds, including welds attaching non-pressure parts to pressure parts, having a throat thickness greater than 1/4 in…. UG-100 Standard Pneumatic (a) Subject to the provisions of UG-99(a)(1) and (a)(2), a pneumatic test prescribed in this paragraph may be used in lieu of the standard hydrostatic test prescribed in UG-99 for vessels: (1) that are so designed and/or supported that they cannot safely be filled with water; (2) not readily dried, that are to be used in services where traces of the testing liquid cannot be tolerated and the parts of which have, where possible, been previously tested by hydrostatic pressure to the pressure required in UG-99. (b) Except for enameled vessels, for which the pneumatic test pressure shall be at least equal to, but need not exceed, the maximum allowable working pressure to be marked on the vessel, the pneumatic test pressure shall be at least equal to 1.1 times the maximum allowable working pressure to be stamped on the vessel multiplied by the lowest ratio of the stress value S for the test temperature of the vessel to the stress value S for the design temperature. In no case shall the pneumatic test pressure exceed 1.1 times… (c) The metal temperature during pneumatic test shall be maintained at least 30°F (17°C) above the minimum design metal temperature to minimize brittle fracture risk. [See UG-20 and General Note (6) to Fig. UCS-66.2] * API 510 states as minimum Pneumatic tests shall meet all the safety requirements of ASME Section VIII. (d) The pressure in the vessel shall be gradually increased to not more than one-half of the test pressure. The test pressure shall be increased in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure has been reached. Pressure shall be reduced to a value equal to the test pressure divided by 1.1 and held for a sufficient time to permit inspection of the vessel…

61

UG-100 Standard Pneumatic Test 1. If the test is required it shall be conducted after welded repairs. 2. The welded repairs shall be subjected to the tests required by UW-50. 3. The test pressure must at least be 1.1 times the MAWP or whatever the original design Code specified i.e.1.25. 4. Test pressure is adjusted for lowest ratio of stresses. (Same method as hydrostatic testing) 5. Metal must be maintained at least 30 °F over MDMT. 6. The test pressure shall be raised at a gradual rate to not more than 1/2 the test pressure and then raised by 1/10th of the test pressure until the test is reached. 7. Visual inspection must be made at test pressure divided by 1.1 or whatever was originally used.. The visual may be waived if the requirements in UG-100 are met. Problem: Calculate the required pneumatic test pressure for a vessel using the following conditions. Material Design Temp. Test Temp MAWP

Carbon Steel 700 o F 85°F 350 psi

Step 1: Determine the ratio of stresses for the test and design temperatures. (a) From Table 1A Section II Part D. Stress allowed at 700 o F= 15,500 psi Stress allowed at 85 o F= 16,300 psi(b) Per UG-100 the ratio equals Step 2 Per UG-100(b) Test pressure equals 1.1 x MAWP x

Stress at Test Temp. 1.1 x 350 psi x 1.05 = 404.25 psi Stress at Design Temp. Pneumatic Test Procedure

1. Slowly raise the pressure to approximately one-half 404.25 psi which equals 202.125. Next raise the pressure in steps of one-tenth of the test pressure. 2. 202.125 + 40.425 = 242.55 psi 3. 242.55 + 40.425= 282.975 psi 4. 282.975 + 40.425 = 323.40 psi 5. 323.40 + 40.425 = 363.825 psi 6. 363.825 + 40.425 = 404.25 psi There are a total of 6 steps when raising up to pneumatic test pressure. Finally lower to the inspection pressure of 404.25/1.1 = 367.5 psi

62

UG-102 Test Gauges Overview The Code has some definite requirements for the selection and uses of gages for the tests described in UG-99 and UG-100. Directions for location, number of, range of and the calibration of the indicating gage(s) is located in UG-102. The high points of UG-102 are below. 1. An indicating gage shall be connected directly to the vessel. If it is not readily visible to the operator of the test equipment an additional gage shall be used which is visible.... 2. When doing large vessel pressure tests it is recommended to have a recording gage in addition to the indicating gage. 3. Dial type indicating gages shall have a range of about double the maximum test pressure, but in no case shall the range of the gage be less than 1 1/2 times nor more than 4 times the maximum test pressure. 4. Digital gages having a wider range may be used as long as they provide the same or greater accuracy of the dial type. 5. All gages shall be calibrated against a standard deadweight tester or a calibrated master gage. 6. Gages must be calibrated any time their accuracy is in doubt.

63

Section 6 Post Weld Heat Treatment

Lesson 6 Post Weld Heat Treatment UW-40 Definition of Nominal Thickness for Butt Welds The Post Weld Heat Treatment mandatory requirements and time at temperature are based on the base metal’s thickness. The Code defines thickness at a welded joint in a very specific way, which is as follows: (f) The term nominal thickness as used in Tables UCS-56, UCS-56.1, UHA-32 and UHT-56, is the thickness of the welded joint as defined below. For pressure vessels or parts of pressure vessels being postweld heat treated in a furnace charge, it is the greatest weld thickness in any vessel or vessel part which has not previously been postweld heat treated.. (1) When the welded joint connects parts of the same thickness, using a full penetration butt weld, the nominal thickness is the total depth of the weld exclusive of any permitted weld reinforcement.

Depth of weld

(5) When a welded joint connects parts of unequal thicknesses, the nominal thickness shall be the following: (a) the thinner of two adjacent butt-welded parts including head to shell connections;……

UCS-56 Requirements for Post Weld Heat Treatment PWHT is performed to specific rules based on the thickness of the weld to be heat treated. We will now examine those rules. (a) Before applying the detailed requirements and exemptions in these paragraphs, satisfactory weld procedure qualifications of the procedures to be used shall be performed in accordance with all the essential variables of Section IX including conditions of postweld heat treatment or lack of postweld heat treatment. Question: What must always be present prior to welding? Answer: A Section IX qualified welding procedure.

65

(d) The operation of postweld heat treatment shall be carried out by one of the procedures given in UW40 in accordance with the following requirements. (1) The temperature of the furnace shall not exceed 800°F (427°C) at the time the vessel or part is placed in it. (2) Above 800°F (427°C), the rate of heating shall be not more than 400°F/hr (222°C/ hr) divided by the maximum metal thickness of the shell or head plate in inches, but in no case more than 400°F/hr (222°C/hr). ……. 400°F / 2 inches so no more than 200°F/hr

UCS-56 Requirements for Post-Weld Heat Treatment We will now examine the requirements for PWHT using the tabular form of UCS-56 for P-Number 1 base metal. This is just one Table, there are many more based on the material’s P-Number. The others follow the same format and once we have learned to use this one the others will be much easier to understand. You are responsible for all of the tables on this examination however most questions come from the PNumber 1 Table! The tables cannot be interpreted with out reading the notes that are beneath them. Let’s have a look.

66

We can gather the following from the Table for P-Number 1 materials that; • The normal holding temperature is 1100 oF for P-No. 1. • The minimum time at holding temperature is based on the thickness of the part. • Note 1 references alternative PWHT holding temperatures • Note 2 determines the thickness at which PWHT is mandatory. There are three cases of thickness listed in the table P-1. •

Up to 2 inches (51 mm) the PWHT is held for 1 hour per inch (25 mm) of thickness with 15 minutes minimum in all cases. The 15 minute minimum applies to cases where; 1. The vessel is in lethal service and requires PWHT in all thicknesses. 2.

The vessel is being heat treated voluntarily to prevent a service induced problem such as cracking i.e. Amine service.

67

Note (2) Postweld heat treatment is mandatory under the following conditions: (a) for welded joints over 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) nominal thickness; ( So 1- 9/16” (40 mm) and greater would require PWHT) (b) for welded joints over 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) nominal thickness through 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) nominal thickness unless preheat is applied at a minimum temperature of 200°F (93°C) during welding; Based on the various thicknesses up to 2 inches we have the following graphical representation of these rules. The Code sets the minimum thickness of a vessel at 1/16” (1.6 mm) in paragraph UG-16, one exception is for an Unfired Steam Boiler which has a 1/4” (6 mm) minimum. Reason For PWHT 1/16 to 2 inches 1/16" to ¼” Lethal or Service reason

1/16"

to ¼” 15 min.

½” 30 min. ¾” 45 min. Exceeds 1-¼” up to 1-½” if no preheat applied. > 1-½” Thickness

1” - 1 hour. > 1-¼” 1:15 min. No Preheat 1-½” 1:30 min. No Preheat 1-¾” 1:45 min. 2” 2 hours.

The second thickness range: •

Over 2 in. (51 mm) to 5 in. (127 mm) the PWHT is held for a flat 2 hours for the first 2 inches (51 mm) of thickness with an additional 15 minutes per inch over 2 inches. Let’s look at a graphic of this thickness range. OVER 2 in. to 5 in. (51 mm to 127 mm)

First 2 in. (51 mm) 2 hours 3 in (75 mm) Additional 1 in. (25 mm) 15 min. - Total 2:15 min.

68

The third thickness range: •

Over 5 in. (127 mm) the PWHT is held for a flat 2 hours for the first 2 inches (51 mm) of thickness with an additional 15 minutes per inch over 2 inches. For P-Number 1 there is no change from the previous example. This third range does changes for some of the other PNumbers. Look at the P-Number 4 Table for example;

Alternative Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirements for Carbon and Low Alloy Steels By Note 1 of Table UCS 56 for P-Number 1 materials, it is possible to PWHT at a temperature lower than that given in Table UCS-56. It involves heat treating for a longer periods of time, based on the amount of reduction in temperature below the stated minimum in Table UCS-56. The following Table UCS-56.1 outlines these rules.

69

Before going any further it must be cautioned that you cannot use this alternate unless you have been referred to it by a note in one of the material tables. In our example we are using Note 1 referenced by PNumber 1. From the table we find that there are three columns. •

The left column lists the decrease in temperature below that given on the appropriate table in UCS-56 based on material.

•

The center lists the Minimum Holding Time at a decreased temperature and;

•

The third lists references to notes below the table.

Reading Note 1 found below the chart and referenced up in the Minimum Holding Time column we see; (1) Minimum holding time for 1 in. (25 mm) thickness or less. Add 15 minutes per inch(25 mm) fro thickness greater tan 1 in. (25 mm). Reading Note 2 listed in the Notes column; (2) These lower postweld heat treatment temperatures permitted only for P-No. 1 Gr. 1 and 2 materials. As regards Note 2, there is a P-No. 1 Group 3 material. So be cautious on the exam this could be a trick question. Note 1 is best addressed using a graphic as follows; We will first examine a 50°F (28°C) drop from 1100 to1050°F. Below is the holding time from our previous 3” coupon based on 1100°F. How long would we be required to hold it at 1050°F? Lower PWHT at 1050 F

First 1 in. (25 mm) 2 hours 3 in (75 mm)

Additional 1 in. (25 mm) add 15 min. Additional 1 in. (25 mm) add 15 min. Total 2:30

Which leads to this total time, up from 2:15 min. to 2:30 min. Now how about 100°F reduction to 1000°F?

70

Section 7 UG-28 External Pressure

Lesson 7 UG-28 External Pressure

UG – 28 Thicknesses of Shells and Tubes under External Pressure (a) Rules for the design of shells and tubes under external pressure given in this Division are limited to cylindrical shells, with or without stiffening rings, tubes, and spherical shells….. (b) The symbols defined below are used in the procedures of this paragraph: A = factor determined from Fig. G in Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D and used to enter the applicable material chart in Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D…… B = factor determined from the applicable material chart in Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D for maximum design metal temperature, psi . DO

= outside diameter of cylindrical shell course or tube, in.

E

= Not on exam.

L = total length, in. (mm), of a tube between tubesheets, or design length of a vessel section between lines of support (see Fig. UG-28.1). A line of support is: (1) a circumferential line on a head…. Not on exam! (2) a stiffening ring……. Not on exam! (3) a jacket closure ……. Not on exam! (4) a cone-to-cylinder Not on exam! P = external design pressure, psi Pa

= calculated value of maximum allowable external working pressure for the assumed value of t, psi

RO

= outside radius of spherical shell, in.

t = minimum required thickness of cylindrical shell or tube, or spherical shell, in. ts = nominal thickness of cylindrical shell or tube, in.

71

Beginning with UG-28(c) there are step by step instructions for working these problems. We will go through these steps one at a time. (c) Cylindrical Shells and Tubes. The required minimum thickness of a cylindrical shell or tube under external pressure, either seamless or with longitudinal butt joints, shall be……. 1. Cylinders having Do /t values > or = 10: Step 1 Assume a value for t and determine the ratios L/Do and Do /t. * You do not assume a value for thickness (t) on the exam, it will be given in the stated problem for the external pressure shell or tube calculation. As will the (Do) Diameter Outside and the (L) Length in other words all that is needed to solve the problem will be provided. Looking at an example, we can start learning this process. 1. Cylinders having Do /t values > or = 10:

Step 1 Assume a value for t and determine the ratios L/Do and Do /t. Example: The cylinder has corroded to a wall thickness of 0.530”, its length is 120” and the outside diameter is 10”. It operates at 500°F. So then; Temperature = 500°F t = 0.530” L = 120” Do = 10” Calculate Do/t = 10/.530 = 18.8 call it 19 (no need to be exact) Now we do L/Do = 120/10 = 12

72

Step 2 Enter Fig. G in Subpart 3 of Section II, Part at the value of L/Do determined in Step 1 For values of L/Do greater than 50, enter the chart at a value of L/Do = 50. For values of L/Do less than 0.05, enter the chart at a value of L/Do = 0.05. In our example problem we must go up the left side of the Fig. G until we reach the value of L/Do of 12. •

Using the chart we have the following;

73

Step 3 Move horizontally to the line for the value Do /t determined in Step 1.. Which in our case was 19, but we will round this to 20 since these problems are not meant to be extremely precise. So now we have.

74

Step 4 From this point of intersection move vertically downward to determine the value of factor A This gives us the following;

75

Step 5

Using the value of A calculated in Step 3, enter the applicable material chart in Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D for the material under consideration. Move vertically to an intersection with the material/temperature line for the design temperature see UG-20). Interpolation may be made between lines for intermediate temperatures. In cases where the value of A falls to the right of the end of the material /temperature line, assume an intersection with the horizontal projection of the upper end of the material/temperature line.

To use the next figure we enter at the bottom at the value Factor A = .0028 and then up to our temperature of 500°F. A = .0028 and then up to our temperature of 500°F.

Factor B is 12,000. Plug it into the formula and we have our External Pressure allowable, Pa Which will be;

Pa =

4x12000 48000 = = 842 psi 3x19 57

As regards the final answers to these problems, because of the difficulty of being precise with the Fig. G there will always be some difference from one person to the next in the determination of Factor A. This is allowed for on the exam by listing choices of answers that are in a range of +/- 5%. In our previous problem the answer was 842 psi, on the exam the correct choice would have been offered as 799 to 884 psi, i.e. Answer Range: 799 – 884 psi

76

To Summarize UG-28 External calculations depart significantly from internal calculations simply because under external pressure the vessel is being crushed. Internal pressure wants to tear the vessel apart. Because of the crushing or buckling load, the Length the Outside Diameter and the Thickness of the vessel are important. External pressure problems are based on the thickness of the shell to the outside diameter ratios. There are two types of external pressure calculations, the type we will use is when the O.D to (Do) thickness ratio (t) is greater than 10 and the other type, not on the test, is when it is less than 10. In order to solve these types of problems two charts will be required. The first chart Fig. G is used to find a value called Factor A and then Factor A is used to find a Factor B in the second material specific chart. The value of Factor B found is the number needed to solve the problem using the formula given in paragraph UG-28 (c)(1) step 6. As stated in the API 510 Body of Knowledge, these charts will be provided in the exam body, IF an external calculation is given on the examination.

77

Find the allowed external pressure on an existing vessel of a known thickness with a Do/t ratio > 10. Problem: A vessel is operating under an external pressure, the operating temperature is 500° F. The outside diameter of the vessel is 40 inches. Its length is 70 inches. The vessel’s wall is 1.25 inches thick and is of SA-515-70 plate. Its specified min. yield is 38,000 psi. What is the maximum external pressure allowed? Givens: Temp = 500° F t = 1.25 L = 70 inches D0 = 40 inches

From UG-28 (c) Cylindrical Shells and Tubes The required minimum thickness of a shell or a tube under external pressure, either seamless or with longitudinal butt joints, shall be determined by the following procedure. (1) Cylinders having a … Testing to see if this paragraph applies:

Do 40 = = 32 t 1.25 Step 1 Our value of Do is 40 inches and L is 70 inches. We will use these to determine the ratio of:

L 70 = = 1.75 Do 40

78

Step 2 Enter the Factor A chart at the value of 1.75 previously determined. Step 3 Then move across horizontally to the curve Do/t = 32. Then down from this point to find the value of Factor A which is .0045

79

Step 4. Using our value of Factor A calculated in Step 3, enter the Factor B (CS-2) chart on the bottom. Move vertically to the material temperature line given in the stated problem (in our case 500°F).

Step 5 Then across to find the value of Factor B. We find that Factor B is approximately 13000. Step 6 Using this value of Factor B; calculate the value of the maximum allowable external pressure Pa using the following formula:

Pa =

Pa =

4B 3( D o

t

)

4x13,000 52,000 = = 541.66 psi 3(32) 96 +/- 5%

Answer Range: 514 – 568 psi

80

Section 8 Charpy Impact Testing

Lesson 8 Charpy Impact Testing

This is why we Impact test! Brittle Fracture and Charpy Impact Testing Overview The concern expressed by the Codes should now be very clear based on the previous pictures. Brittle fracture can and does occur. So exactly what is brittle fracture? Perhaps the best way to explain this is to contrast two materials commonly used: • • • • • • •

Glass and Lead Glass is of course very brittle at room temperature. Lead is very ductile at room temperature. Glass shatters when struck. Lead deforms, it flows plastically without rupture (ductility). Glass is hard with a high strength and has little ductility. Lead is soft with a low strength and deforms under load.

In pressure vessels we need something in between. So using the term loosely, we do not want our pressure vessel in “glass like state” when it is exposed to lower temperatures. It must be able to absorb energy in the presence of a Code acceptable size flaw such as a small welding discontinuity or unknown crack like flaw. Designers must evaluate a given material of construction for its acceptability, at what ASME Section VIII refers to as the vessel’s Minimum Design Metal Temperature (MDMT). The question becomes, is this metal in this thickness and heat treated condition, prone to brittle fracture at the desired MDMT?

81

Section VIII has several paragraphs that address the acceptability for materials; these are referred to as exemptions from Charpy Testing. For purposes of the examination we are restricted to paragraph UCS. So the task becomes evaluating a given material for exemptions from testing. This is a four step process, ending with a ‘yes you must’ or ‘no you don’t’ solution. The four steps are; 1. The exemption given in paragraph UG-20(f). 2. The exemptions listed in UCS-66 (Table UCS-66). 3. The reduction in temperature provided by Table UCS-66.1 to Table UCS-66 4. The reduction in temperature to Table UCS-66 given in paragraph UCS-68(c). If at the end of the 4 steps, impact testing is required, then they must be conducted in accordance with the rules described in the paragraph UG-84. There exist two possible categories of questions on the examination. 1. Are they required? 2. If the tests are required •

How must they be conducted and,

•

What passes and what is considered to have failed the tests?

We start with are they required? The search will begin in UG-20(f) and progress through UCS 66, and 68. If no exemption is found impact tests are required. The best approach is to list these by steps.

82

Step 1 UG-20(f) lists an exemption from impact testing for materials that meet “All” of the following requirements. 1. Material is limited to P-No.1 Gr. No.1 or 2 and the thicknesses don't exceed the following: (a) 1/2 in. for materials listed in Curve A of Fig. UCS-66; (b) 1 in for materials from Curve B, C or D of Fig. UCS-66; 2. The completed vessel shall be hydrostatically tested 3. Design temperature is no warmer than 650°F or colder than -20°F. 4. The thermal or mechanical shock loadings are not controlling design. 5. Cyclical loading is not a controlling design requirement. Reminder All of the conditions of UG-20(f) must be met to take this exemption from impact testing. Step 2 UCS-66 (a) Turn your attention to Fig. UCS-66 Impact Test Exemption Curves and Table UCS-66. The Graph or Table is used to determine the minimum temperature a material thickness can be operated at without mandatory impact testing. The graph has four curves: A, B, C and D. In Fig. UCS-66 along with the graph is a listing of carbon and low alloy steels. This listing of materials is used to determine the curve on the Graph or in the Table for a

given material. After finding the curve for the material, there are two choices. You may use the graph of figure UCS 66 or the Table UCS 66 to determine the minimum temperature for a given thickness. It is recommended to use the Table. The Table is a lot easier to use with accuracy. If the material thickness is operated at or above the temperature listed in Table UCS-66, impact tests are not required. If the material thickness is to operate below the given minimum temperature, impact testing

83

is required. The temperature found in the table is the MDMT of that material thickness without impact testing being required.

84

Step 2 Figure UCS-66 Material Curves Let’s take the example of material that has been assigned to Curve B which is 2 inches (51 mm) thick. Using the more friendly table we find the column for Curve B materials, move down until we find the thickness row for 2 inches and across to find the MDMT that this material can be used without impact testing is 63oF (17oC).

That doesn’t seem like an acceptable minimum design temperature for most vessels. This makes a Curve B material a poor choice at 2” thickness. Step 3 Figure UCS 66.1 Coincident Ratio The Coincident Ratio is based on a vessel’s extra thickness due to its design calculations which were based on its Maximum Temperature. Meaning that; As metal’s temperature increases its strength decreases, hotter means weaker, therefore the allowable stress is decreased during calculations resulting in vessel that requires thicker walls when hot than when it is operating at its coldest temperature, the MDMT. This ratio takes credit for the extra wall thickness that is present, but not needed to resist pressure at the MDMT. The following graphic will help. Usually when there is a drop in temperature there is also a drop in the pressure. The two operating conditions are calculated and the Ratio is determined. This Ratio is given on the exam and you need only use the table to apply this rule.

85

Coincident Ratio Figure UCS-66.1 Using the Coincident Ratio given in a problem we enter the graph on the left side at that value then across to intersect the curve now down to find a temperature given. We take that temperature back to Table UCS-66 and reduce the temperature given there for the material of interest by the amount we found using Table UCS-66.1.

86

Example:

The Coincident Ratio is given as .60. Now using our previous Table UCS-66 2” Curve B material that has a MDMT of 63 oF we adjust and find a new MDMT. Like this!

63 – 40 = 23oF our adjusted MDMT Step 4 UCS-68(a)

Design rules for carbon and low alloy steels stipulate requirements about construction of the vessel or part. The main points are: mandatory joint types, required post weld heat treatments below -55 °F unless the vessel is installed in a fixed (stationary) location, and the coincident Ratio of stress is less than 0.35.

UCS-68(b)

Welded joints must be postweld heat treated when required buy other rules of this Division or when the MDMT is colder than -55°F and for vessel installed in a fixed (stationary) location the coincident Ratio is 0.35 or greater.

UCS-68(c)

Notice a reduction of 30°F below that of Figure UCS-66 for P-1 materials if post welded heat treatment is performed when it is not otherwise required in the Code. This means that 30°F can be subtracted from the temperature found in Table UCS-66. If the adjusted temperature is below that desire, Impact Tests are not required. It is exempt. If a statement about heat treatment is made in a particular problem the task becomes finding out if heat treatment was required or not. If it is not mentioned, it must be concluded that it was not performed and therefore the exemption cannot be taken.

Example: Givens: Material

SA-516-70 normalized (plate)

Thickness

2"

Min. Yield

38 KSI

MDMT

-25 °F

Coincident Ratio = .85

87

Step 1: Check for the exemptions of UG-20(f) Our material applies to Curve D of Figure UCS-66 and exceeds the 1“ limit for exemption. It also exceeds and lower temperature limits - 20°F. Our Material 516 Normalized is on Curve D below

88

Step 2: Checking Table UCS-66 and entering at our thickness of 2 inches on the left and moving across to Curve D column, we find the MDMT of this thickness to be -4°F. This exemption does not apply our goal is -25°F.

Step 3: Checking Fig. UCS-66.1 and entering at our stated Coincident Ratio of .85 and then down to read the temperature reduction permitted we find 15°F.

89

Step 3: This 15°F is subtracted directly from the table UCS-66. So we now have And

-4 -15 -19 °F

from Table UCS-66 from Table UCS-66.1

Not there yet, we need -25 °F to be exempt from testing. Step 4 UCS-68 (c)

If postweld heat treating is performed when it is not otherwise a requirement of this Division, a 30°F (17 °C) reduction in impact testing exemption temperature may be given to the minimum permissible temperature from Fig. UCS-66 for P-No.1 materials.

P-1 materials (only) if post welded heat treatment is performed when it is not otherwise required. This would occur if the note 2(b) of table UCS-56 for P No. 1 materials is complied with or if the vessel is in general service and has no mandatory heat treatment requirements in the Code.

Checking UCS-68 (c), we find that we cannot take a reduction because PWHT is a requirement of UCS56 for this material's thickness of 2 inches. Answer: Impact tests are required for the desired MDMT of -25 °F. So how must they be done?

90

UG-84 Charpy Impact Tests UG-84(a) General Charpy impact tests in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph shall be made on weldments and all materials for shells, heads, nozzles, for which impact tests are required by the rules in Subsection C. UG-84(b) Test Procedures UG-84(b)(1) Impact test procedures and apparatus shall conform to the applicable paragraphs of SA-370. * SA-370 is a document that describes in great detail the actual procedure for breaking specimens. UG-84(c) Test Specimens UG-84(c)(1) Each set of impact test specimens shall consist of three specimens. UG-84(c)(1) Each set of impact test specimens shall consist of three specimens. UG-84(c)(2)

The impact test specimens shall be of the Charpy V-notch type and shall conform in all respects to Fig. UG-84.The standard (10 mm ×10 mm) specimens, when obtainable, shall be used for nominal thicknesses of 0.438 in. (11.13 mm) or greater, except as otherwise permitted.

.

91

UG-84(c)(6)

When the * average value of the three specimens equals or exceeds the minimum value permitted for a single specimen and the value for more than one specimen is below the required average value, or when the value for one specimen is below the minimum value permitted for a single specimen, a retest of three additional specimens shall be made. The value for each of these retest specimens shall equal or exceed the required average value.

Example: Average required is 15 ft-lb (joules 20.4) * 15 + 16 + 14 = 45/3 = 15 Passed. * 18 + 14 + 13 = 45/3 = 15 Failed, more than one below 15 * 18 + 18 + 9 = 45/3 = 15 Failed, one below 2/3 of 15 = 10 UG-84(d)(1) Reports or certificates of impact tests by the material manufacturer will be acceptable evidence that the material meets the requirements of this paragraph, provided the specimens comply with UCS-85, UHT-5, or UHT-81, as applicable. *

This means you may not have to do impact tests on your base material because the manufacturer has performed the tests already and they meet the Code requirements.

UG-84(f)(2) All test plates shall be subjected to heat treatment, including cooling rates and aggregate time at temperature or temperatures as established by the Manufacturer for use in actual manufacture. Let’s try to interpret what this statement means in practical terms. * Charpy tests must be conducted with the test coupon having received the minimum required PWHT. So if a vessel underwent 2 hours of PWHT, then it has been proven that the 2 hours of PWHT did not make the vessel subject to brittle fracture. Now suppose you need to repair the vessel after having been in service. PWHT would be required again for two hours where the repair was made. That local area will now have seen 4 hours of PWHT. Has the additional 2 hours made it brittle? There is only one way to find out, more Charpy testing. Where do you get the metal from for the Charpy coupons? Out of the vessel, which is not easy and very expensive? ** API 510 has an alternative method.

92

UG-84(g) Location, Orientation, Temperature, and Values of Weld Impact Tests All weld impact tests shall comply with the following: UG-84(g)(1)

Each set of weld metal impact specimens shall be taken across the weld with the notch in the weld metal. Each specimen shall be oriented so the notch is normal to the surface of the material and one face of the specimen shall be within 1/16” (1.6 mm) of the surface of the material. Front View

UG-84(g)(2) Each set of heat affected zone impact specimens shall be taken across the weld and of sufficient length to locate, after etching, the notch in the heat affected zone. The notch shall be cut approximately normal to the material surface in such a manner as to include as much heat affected zone material as possible in the resulting fracture.

93

UG-84(h) Impact Tests of Welding Procedure Qualifications UG-84(h)(1) General. For steel vessels of welded construction, the impact toughness of the welds and heat affected zones of the procedure qualification test plates shall be…... UG-84(h)(2) When Required. Welding procedure impact tests shall be made when required by UCS-67, UHT-82, or UHA-51. For vessels constructed to the rules of Part UCS, the test plate material shall satisfy all of the following requirements…… (a) be of the same P-Number and Group Number; (b) be in the same heat treated condition; and (c) meet the minimum notch toughness requirements of UG-84(c)(4) for the thickest material of the range of base material qualified by the procedure. (UG-84(h)(3) Material Over 1-1/2” Thick. When procedure tests are made on material over 1-1/2” (38 mm) thick, three sets of impact specimens are required. One set of heat affected zone specimens shall be taken as described in (g)(2). Two sets of impact specimens shall be taken from the weld with one located within 1/16” the surface of one side of the material and one set taken as near as practical midway between the surface and the center of thickness of the opposite side as described in (g).

94

Acceptance Values for Impact Tests

95

Section 9 Fillet Welds and Reinforcement

Lesson 9 Fillet Welds and Reinforcement UW-16 Minimum Requirements for Attachment Welds at Openings (a) General (1) The terms: nozzles, connections, reinforcements, necks, tubes, fittings, pads, and other similar terms used in this paragraph define essentially the same type construction and form a Category D weld joint between the nozzle (or other term) and the shell, head, etc… (2) The location and minimum size of attachment welds for nozzles and other connections shall conform to the requirements of this paragraph in addition to the strength “path” calculations required in UW-15. Not on exam! These are variables that will apply to the Exam. t = nominal thickness of vessel shell or head, in. t n= nominal thickness of nozzle wall, in. tmin= the smaller of 3/4 in. or the thickness of the thinner of the parts joined by a fillet, single-bevel, or single-J weld, in. tc= not less than the smaller of 1/4 in. or 0.7tmin t1 or t2 = not less than the smaller of 1/4 in. or 0.7tmin

The fillet weld sizing of UW-16 can be solved in either of two ways. That is, you may determine if a fillet weld leg size provides an adequate fillet weld throat size per Code or based on the thicknesses of the shell and nozzle determine the minimum throat size required and convert that to leg size. In the latter case, usually the leg size decimal value is rounded to the next fractional 1/16th inch. In these examples we will work it both ways using the same shell and nozzle thicknesses. The examples will be restricted to only Fig UW-16.1(i).

97

Problem: A nozzle is being attached to a shell as shown in Fig.UW-16.1 (i) using two equal size fillet welds. The shell's thickness is 7/8 in. and the nozzle's thickness is 1/2 inch. The fillet welds are 3/8 inch in leg size. Does this meet Code?

Case 1: Determine the minimum throat size. From Fig. UW-16.1(i) we are given that: t 1 or t 2 not less than

t 1 + t 2 ≥ 1 1 t min 4

the smaller of 1

4

in.

or .707 t min.

From UW-16 we are given the following definitions: tmin = the smaller of 3/4 in. or the thickness of the thinner of the two parts joined by a fillet weld. t1 and t2 are the throat sizes of the welds as depicted in Fig. UW-16.1(i).

Step 1 Determine the throat size of a 3/8 in leg size fillet weld.

Throat size equals .707 times leg size. 0.707 x 0.375 in. = .265 in. = t 1 or t2 Step 2 Determine tmin tmin = the smaller of 1/2 in or 3/4 in. So tmin = 1/2 in. Step 3 Determine if:

t 1 + t 2 ≥ 1 1 t min 4

.265" + .265" ≥ 1.25 x .500" .530" ≥ .625"

0.530" is neither greater than nor equal to .625". Therefore the first test fails and the throat size of the 3/8" leg fillet weld is too small. We could stop here and answer the question with a no, but let's finish up with the second test of size required for an illustration of the technique required.

98

Step 4 Test to see if: t 1 or t 2 not less than the smaller of 1

4

in.

or .707 t min.

Not less than the smaller of .250 in. or .707 x 1/2 in. .707 x .500" = .353“ So not less than .250". Both t1 and t2 are .265". .265 in. > .250 in. Fillet welds are adequate in the second test. However a fillet weld size must pass both tests! Case 2: Based on material thicknesses determine the minimum leg size of equal sized fillet welds to the next 1/16th inch. In our problem thicknesses are 7/8 inch (shell) and 1/2 inch (nozzle). We have already determined that 3/8 inch leg fillet welds are too small. So let's determine what size of equal leg fillet welds are required rounded up to the next 1/16th inch. The approach here is to find the value of 1-1/4 tmin and divide by 2 to find the throat of two equal sized fillets welds. Then convert to leg size. It goes like this; Step 1 Determine tmin tmin = the smaller of 1/2 in or 3/4 in. So tmin = 1/2 in. Step 2 Determine .707 tmin .707 x .500" = .353” Step 3 Determine 1 1/4 tmin 1.25 x .500" = .625“ From Fig. UW-16.1(i) we are given that: t 1 or t 2 not less than the smaller of 1 in. 4 or .707 t min.

t 1 + t 2 ≥ 1 1 t min 4

Step 4. First a 1/4" throat requires a leg size of .353” about 3/8 inches. A : .625/2 = .3125 So .3125 + .3125 = 1 1/4 tmin B : .3125 > .250 ( t1 or t2 minimum size is satisfied) C : To convert throat to leg, divide the throat by .707 .3125/.707 = .4420 (Round up to the next 1/16”). 6/16 = .375 or 7/16 = .4375 or 8/16 = .500 .4375 < .4420 <.500 Answer leg size 1/2” (0.500”)

99

UG-36 Opening in Pressure Vessels (3) Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforcement other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions: (a) welded, brazed, and flued connections meeting the applicable rules and with a finished opening not larger than: 1. 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) diameter in vessel shells or heads 3/8 in. or less in thickness; 2. 2-3/8 in. diameter in vessel shells or heads over 3/8 in. in thickness; The main things of interests in this paragraph to the API 510 inspector are the following: (1) All references to dimensions apply to the finished construction after deduction for material added as corrosion allowance. (2) Openings not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforcement other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions: (a) The finished opening is not larger than: 3 1/2” diameter in vessel shells or heads 3/8” or less in thickness 2- 3/8” diameter in vessel shells or heads over 3/8” in thickness (c) No two isolated un-reinforced openings, in accordance with the above shall have their centers closer to each other than the sum of their diameters

UG-40 Limits of Reinforcement This paragraph defines the distance in any direction that can count as reinforcement in your calculations. This means that if a vessel wall has excess metal above that required by calculation, how far on each side of the opening can you take credit for this extra metal as reinforcement? Also considered is how much of the nozzle excess thickness above the hole in the vessel can be counted as reinforcement for the opening. UG-40 (a). You may not need to replace all of the metal removed. Given as A: The dark cross hatched area is the diameter of the finished opening multiplied times the minimum thickness that is the required by the calculations of UG-27 for a shell or UG -32 if the opening is in a head, etc.

100

b. The vessel and the nozzle walls usually have excess thickness above that required to resist pressure. This excess thickness is counted toward reinforcement. Corrosion allowance cannot be included in areas A1 or A2 below. Given as A1 and A2. The shaded areas are the extra metal.

c. If the nozzle extends inside the shell, within certain limits this nozzle metal can be counted, less any corrosion allowance. The API 510 exam body of knowledge has excluded inward projection from the test. Given as A3 ****Note: Area 3 has been eliminated on the API 510 Body of Knowledge.

d. The welds used to attach the nozzle to the shell count as area available for reinforcement. Interior weld area has been eliminated because the exam does not cover inward projections.

Given as A4 Out Side Fillet Only For Exam No Interior Projection on the Examination!

e. The required cross-sectional area shall be the area of the shell or head required to resist pressure which is given as A. If the sum of A1+A2+A4 is equal to or greater than A the opening is adequately reinforced If not, more reinforcement must be added. Usually this will be in the form of a reinforcement pad. Its area is found as follows: A - (A1+A2+A4) = Area required for the re-pad, thicker nozzle or, shell wall if the sum of the three is less than A.

101

This type of problem can get complicated very quickly because of the number of steps involved. However the API 510 Exam Body of Knowledge has simplified this type of problem by doing this: a. There will be no inward projection for the nozzle. b. The nozzle will enter at 90 degrees to the shell or head (All F values are set to 1.0). c. The opening will not pass through a Category A weld (All E values are set to 1.0). d. Nozzles and shell will be of the same strength (All fr1, fr2 etc. values are set to 1.0). e. Actual thickness and required thickness of shells and nozzles will be given within the problem (No calculation for tr or tr n will be required). f. The inspector should be able to compensate for corrosion allowance. Weld strength calculations are excluded. The API 510 Body of Knowledge has placed the following limits on reinforcement problems. The inspector should: a. Understand the key concepts of reinforcement. 1. Replacement of strength removed 2. Limits of reinforcement 3. Credit can be taken for extra metal in the shell and nozzle b. Be able to calculate the required size of a reinforcement pad or to assure a designed pad is large enough. To simplify the problem: 1. All fr = 1.0 2. All F = 1.0 3. All E = 1.0 4. All thicknesses are given. 5. There will be no nozzle projecting inside the shell.

102

The original formulas

103

Crossing out the null values

104

The cooked formulae

105

Calculation of Reinforcement Example: For our example we will use the case given in Appendix L-7 Number 1. This is a simple case but serves to introduce the concepts required to begin to understand what is required to calculate compensation problems. It is suggested that when practicing these problems, or for that matter any of the others that you remove, if needed, the page which gives nomenclature for the symbols used in the formulas you are applying, also any figures or tables that may be needed. In this way you will not need to flip back and forth and there will be less chance for mistakes.

FIG. L-7.1 EXAMPLE OF REINFORCED OPENING OPENINGS AND REINFORCEMENTSL-7 WELDED CONNECTIONSL-7.1 Example 1 A 4 inch I.D., 3/4 in. wall, nozzle conforming to a specification with an allowable stress of 15,000 psi is attached by welding to a vessel that has an inside diameter of 30 in. and a shell thickness of 3/8 in. The shell material conforms to a specification with an allowable stress of 13,700 psi. The internal design pressure is 250 psi at a design temperature of 150°F. There is no allowance for corrosion. The longitudinal joint meets the spot examination requirements of UW-52. The opening does not pass through a vessel Category A joint (see UW-3). There are no butt welds in the nozzle. Check the construction for full penetration groove-weld and for the 3/8 in. fillet cover-weld shown in Fig. L-7.l Size of weld required [UW-16(c), Fig. UW-16.1 sketch (c)]: tc = not less than the smaller of ¼ in. or 0.7 tmin where; tmin = lesser of 3/4 in. or the thickness less corrosion allowance of the thinner part joined =lesser of 3/4 in. or 3/8 in. tc (minimum) = lesser of ¼ in. or 0.707 (3/8), i.e., 1/4 in. or 0.263 in. tc (actual) =0.7 (0.375) = 0.263 in. 0.263 in > 0.25 in Cover weld is satisfactory. Strength calculations for attachment welds are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1 sketch (c) [see UW-15(b)] fr1 = fr2 = 15.0/ 13.7 > 1.0; Therefore, use fr1 = fr2 = 1.0

Continued Area of reinforcement required

106

A1 = larger of following A1 = d(t-tr) = 4(0.375-0.277) 0.392 sq. in A1 = 2(t+tn)(t-tr) = 2(0.75+0.375)(0.375-0.277) = 0.220 sq. in. A2 = smaller of following A2 = 5(tn-trn)t = 5(0.75-0.034)0.375 = 1.34 sq. in. A2 = 5(tn-trn)tn = 5(0.75-0.034)0.75 = 2.69 sq. in. A41 = 2 x 0.5 x (0.375)2 = 0.141 sq in. Area provided by A1 + A2 + A41 = 0.392+1.37+0.141 = 1.88 sq. in. No Additional reinforcement is required!

107

Section 10 Materials, Name Plates, and Data Reports

Lesson 10 Materials, Name Plates, and Data Reports UG-77 Material Identification The material for pressure parts must be handled in a particular way per the Code. For instance, the Code specifies that materials for parts of a vessel should be laid out and marked in such a way as to easily maintain traceability after the vessel is completed. Several techniques for identification markings are allowed and are described in this paragraph. Stamping is the preferred method of marking vessel parts; however, as built drawings and tabulation sheets are also acceptable. The manufacturer must maintain trace ability to the original markings.For instance, when cutting parts for the vessel from plate the heat number stamped on the piece of plate should be transferred prior to cutting the plate. They may be transferred immediately after cutting if a provision for control of such transfers has been made in the Manufacturer's Quality Control System. If a particular material should not be die stamped, plates must be made and attached with the required markings. A record of these markings must be maintained which will allow positive identification of the vessel parts after construction. The part manufacturer can use only materials allowed by the Code. If a Code vessel manufacturer buys parts that are formed, such as heads, from another, the manufacturer of the head shall transfer the markings as applies to the material specification that the part is made from. In addition, the part Manufacturer must supply a Partial Data Report. A Manufacturer's Partial Data Report is not required if the part was formed or forged, etc., without the use of welding. The markings of the Part Manufacturer must be present on the part.The highlights of this paragraph are as follows: 1. Plate is the only pressure vessel material that must always have a Mill Test Report (MTR) or Certificate of Compliance (C of C) provided. The inspector shall examine these documents for compliance to the material specification. 2. All other product forms must be marked in accordance with their material specification. For example, pipe marked SA-106 gr. B. 3. All materials to be used in a vessel must be inspected before fabrication to find as best as is possible defects, which would affect the safety of the vessel. The following describes the inspections required. a. Cut edges of and parts made from rolled plate for serious laminations, shearing cracks, etc. b. Materials, which will be impact tested, must be examined for surface cracks. c. When forming a Category C corner joint as shown in fig. UW 13.2 with flat plate thicker than 1/2 in., the flat plate must be examined before welding by magnetic particle or dye penetrant nondestructive examination. d. The inspector must assure himself that thickness and other dimensions of the material comply with the requirements of this Division. e. The inspector must verify welded repairs to defects.f. The inspector must verify that all required tests have been performed and are acceptable (impact tests, NDE etc.). g. The inspector must confirm material identification has been properly transferred. h. The inspector must confirm that there are no dimensional or material defects, perform internal and external inspections and witness pressure tests.

109

UG-116 Required MarkingThe marking applied to a vessel's nameplate or directly to its shell are described in this paragraph. It is important information. Often a vessel's Data Report is lost and the only information that is available is that found on the Name Plate or the shell itself. In some cases the Name Plate is missing or sand blasted and not readable. The following is a listing of what is required by the Code to be present on the Name Plate. 1. The official Code U or UM symbol. If inspected by the Owner/User of the vessel the word USER shall be marked on the vessel. 2. Name of the manufacturer preceded by the words "Certified by". 3. Maximum allowable working pressure ____psi at __°F. 4. Minimum design metal temperature __°F at ____psi. 5. Manufacturer's serial number. 6. Year built. 7. The type of construction used for the vessel must be marked directly under the Code symbol by the use of the appropriate letter as listed in the Code.

110

8. If a vessel is built using more than one type of construction all shall be indicated. 9. If a vessel is in a special service the lettering as shown below must be applied. a. Lethal Service b. Unfired Steam Boiler c. Direct Firing

L UB DF

10. The MAWP must be based on the most restrictive part of the vessel. 11. When a complete vessel or parts of a vessel of welded construction have been radiographed in accordance with UW-11, the marking must be as follows: a. "RT 1" when all pressure retaining butt welds, other than B and C associated with nozzles and comm. chambers that neither exceed NPS 10 nor 1-1/8 inch thickness have been radiographically examined for their full length in a manner prescribed in UW 51, full radiography of the above exempted Category B and C butt welds if performed, may be recorded… b. "RT 2" Complete vessel satisfies UW-11(a)(5) and UW- 11(a)(5)(b) has been applied. c. "RT 3" Complete vessel satisfies spot radiography of UW-11(b). d. "RT 4" When only part of the vessel satisfies any of the above. 12. The letters HT must be used when the entire vessel has been Postweld heat treated. 13. The letter PHT when only part of the vessel has received partial Postweld heat treatment. 14. Code symbol must be applied after hydro or pneumatic test. 15. Parts of vessels for which Partial Data Report are required shall be marked by the parts manufacturer with the following: a. "PART" b. Name of the Manufacturer c. The manufacturer's serial number. UG-119 Nameplates In this paragraph are the details of nameplates, including such things as the size and methods of markings allowed. The nameplate must be located within 30 in. of the vessel and must be thick enough to resist distortion when stamping is applied. The types of acceptable attachment types include welding, brazing, and tamper resistant mechanical fasteners of metal construction. Adhesive attachments may be used if the provisions of Appendix 18 are met. An additional nameplate may be used if it is marked with the words "DUPLICATE". On previous tests some questions have come from this paragraph. UG-120 Data Reports Data Reports must prepared on form U-1 or U-1A for all vessels that the Code Symbol will be applied to. The Manufacturer and the Inspector must sign them. A single Data Report may represent all vessel made in the same day production run if they meet all of the requirements listed in UG-120. A copy of the Manufacturer's Data Report must be furnished to the User and upon request the Inspector. The manufacturer must either keep a copy of the Data Report on file for 5 years or register the vessel and file the Data Report with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.

111

Section 11 Corrosion Calculations

Lesson 11 Corrosion Calculations Corrosion Example Problems A 60 foot tower consisting of four (4) shell courses was found to have varying corrosion rates in each course. Minimum wall thickness readings were taken after 4 years and 6 months of service. All original wall thicknesses included a 1/8" corrosion allowance. The top course's original thickness was .3125". The present thickness is .3000". The second course downward had an original thickness of .375". During the inspection it was found to have a minimum wall thickness of .349". The third course was measured at .440" its original thickness was .500". The bottom course had an original thickness of .625" and measured to be .595".Determine the metal loss for the top course, the corrosion rate for the second course, the corrosion allowance remaining in the third course, the retirement date for the bottom course.

Solutions TOP COURSE: Metal loss equals the previous thickness minus the present thickness. Previous .3125" Present -.3000" .0125" Metal Loss

SECOND COURSE Corrosion rate equals metal loss per given unit of time. Previous .3750“ Present - .3490" .0260"

Loss .0260" = .006"/ Per Year (rounded) Time 4.5 years

Corrosion Rate s =

113

THIRD COURSE Remaining Corrosion Allowance equals the actual thickness minus the required thickness. Original Thickness Original C. A. Required Wall Thickness

.500" -.125" .375"

Actual Wall Thickness Required Wall Remaining C.A.

.440" -.375" .065“

BOTTOM COURSE Remaining life equals the remaining corrosion allowance divided by the corrosion rate. 1. Required Thickness Original Thickness Original C. A. Required Thickness

. 625" -.125" .500“

2. Remaining Corrosion Allowance Actual Wall Thickness .595“ Required Thickness -.500" Remaining Corr. Allow ..095“ 3. Corrosion Rate Original Thickness .625" Present Thickness -.595“ Metal Loss .030" Metal Loss .030“ = Corrosion Rate = .0067"/Yr. Time 4.5 Years 4. Remaining Life Corrosion Allowance.095“ Corrosion Rate .0067"/Yr.

= 14.2 Yrs. Remaining Life

Just Milling Around In the previous examples we calculated using decimal fractions of an inch such as .006”. However questions on the exam often have the format of Mils or thousandths of and inch. So if you are not familiar with this terminology here are some examples. .1 = 1/10 of an inch .01 = 1/100 of an inch .001 = 1/1000 of an inch or 1 Mil.

This is what is used.

Take our example above .006” this translates to 6 Mils. .0067” translates to 6.7 Mils. Time A year has 12 partsThe next issue is how you handle the odd months in a year. It is all good when it has been an even number of years. However what about 2 years and 5 months?

114

Five months is 5/12th of a year. 5/12 = .416 years rounded to 3 places. Of course 6 months is then 6/12 or .5 years. Example: Based on 4.416 years and a metal loss of 50 Mils we have; Metal Loss 50 Mils Time 4.416 Years

= Corrosion Rate = 11.3 Mils/Yr. Can there be two Corrosion Rates?

Yes, in the API 510 there are, the Long Term and Short Term. Here is the Long Term. From API 510 7.1 page 7-1 The long term corrosion rate (LTCR) shall be calculated from the following formula:

The short term corrosion rate shall be calculated from the following formula:

tinitial = the thickness, in inches(millimeters), at the same location as t actual measured at the initial installation or at the commencement of a new corrosion rate environment. tprevious = the thickness, in inches(millimeters), at the same location as t actual measured during a previous inspection. Long-term and short-term corrosion rates should be compared to as part of the data assessment. The authorized inspector, in consultation with a corrosion specialist, shall select the corrosion rate that best reflects the current process.

115

Corrosion Example Problems Example: A vessel shell had a second set of ultrasonic thickness measurements after 1 year of service, the original baseline wall thickness was 0.500”, and the second set revealed that the shell was now at 0.489”. Five years later a third set of wall readings were taken and the shell was measured to be 0.459”. What value should be used in the Remaining Life calculations? Comparing short term to long term corrosion we find the following values. Normally the most aggressive will be used and in this case it will be the Long Term Corrosion Rate. L.T. = S.T. =

0.500 - 0.459 = 6.8 Mils/ year 6 years 0.489 - 0.459 5 years

= 6 Mils/ year

The remaining life of the vessel shall be calculated from the following formula: Remaining life (years) = tactual =

the actual minimum thickness, in inches determined at the time of inspection for a given location or component.

trequired = the required thickness in inches at the same location or component as the t actual measurement computed by the design formulas (e.g. , pressure and structural) before corrosion allowance and manufacturer’s….

116

Example:

Determine Remaining life of the vessel shell course in the example above. T required thickness of the shell course is 0.388” (known as tminimum). Compare S.T. and L.T. corrosion rates as follows: S.T. rate = 0.006” or 6 Mils a year L.T. rate = 0.0068” or 6.8 Mils a year

Therefore we will use the most aggressive corrosion rate found to be the Long Term Rate.

Remaining life (years) =

0.459"- 0.338" 0.121" 121Mils = = = 17.79Yrs 0.0068"a year 0.0068" 6.8 Mils

What would be the maximum length of time before the next inspection? ANS: ½ the Remaining Life or 10 years whichever is less. Therefore: 17.79/2 = 8.895 years What would be the maximum length of time before the next inspection? From: API 510 page 6-2 6.4 Internal an On-Stream Inspection The period between internal or on-stream inspections shall not exceed one half the estimated remaining life of the vessel based on corrosion rate or 10 years, whichever is less. In cases where the remaining safe operating life is estimated to be less than 4 years, the inspection interval may be the full remaining safe operating life up to a maximum of 2 years.ANS: ½ the Remaining Life or 10 years whichever is less. Therefore: 17.79/2 = 8.895 years

117

Corrosion and Minimum Thickness For a corroded area of considerable size in which the Circumferential Stress Govern, the least thickness along the most critical element of the area may be averaged over a length not exceeding the following: 1. For vessels with the inside diameters less than or equal to 60 inches one half the vessel diameter or 20 inches whichever is less.2. For vessels with the inside diameters greater than 60 inches one third the vessel diameter or 40 inches whichever is less.

When the area contains an opening the distance on either side of the opening within which the thicknesses are averaged shall not extend beyond the limits of the reinforcement as defined in the ASME Code. See Fig. UG-37 and refer to reinforcement calculations for determining the extra metal in the shell.

For Limits: d ( t – tr) or 2(t + tn) ( t – tr) Use the Larger

118

Widely scattered pits may be ignored as long as the following are true:

1. The remaining thickness below the pit is greater than one-half the required thickness. (1/2 t required) 1.0” – 0.125” = 0.875” the required thickness Therefore no pit equal to 0.875”/2 = 0.4375” or greater! Pit #3 à 0.402 < 0.4375” Acceptable. 2. The total area of the pits does not exceed 7 square inches (45 sq. centimeters) within any 8 inch (20 centimeter) diameter circle. We will assume the pits to be circles and use the formula Pi x Radius Squared to determine the area of each pit. Pit # One 3.141 x (0.170/2) 2 = 0.085 2 Pit # Two 3.141 x (0.330/2) 2 = 0.165 2 Pit # Three 3.141 x (0.250/2) 2 = 0.125 2 Pit # Four 3.141 x (0.377/2) 2 = 0.1185 2 Total: 0.2678 sq. in.

= 0.0226 sq. in. = 0.0855 sq. in. = 0.0490 sq. in. = 0.1116 sq. in.

Less than 7 sq. inches Acceptable 3. The sum of their dimensions along any straight line within the circle does not exceed 2 inches Straight line for pits 1-3-4 #1. 0.170” #3. 0.250” #4. 0.377” Total 0.797” < 2 inches Acceptable

119

Weld Evaluation When the surface at a weld with a joint factor other than 1.0 as well as the surfaces remote from the weld is corroded, an independent calculation using the appropriate weld joint factor must be made to determine if thickness at the weld or remote from the weld governs the allowable working pressure. For this calculation the surface at a weld includes 1 inch on either side of the weld, (measured from the toe of the weld), or twice the minimum thickness on either side of the weld, whichever is greater.

Head Evaluation When measuring the corroded thickness of ellipsoidal and torispherical heads the governing thickness may be as follows: 1. The thickness of the knuckle region with the head rating calculated by the appropriate head formula. 2. The thickness of the central portion of the dished region in which case the dished region may be considered to be a spherical segment whose allowable pressure is calculated by the Code formula for spherical shells. 3. For calculating the spherical portion using the spherical formula the following applies to find the spherical radius L: a. L = the OD of the Torispherical head b. L = the ID of the shell times 90% for 2 to 1 Ellipsoidal heads

120

Section 12 Overview Section IX Article I Welding General Requirements

Lesson 12 Overview Section IX Article I Welding General Requirements QW – 100 GeneralSection IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code relates to the qualification of welders, welding operators, brazers, and brazing operators, and the procedures that they employ in welding and brazing…. It is divided into two parts: Part QW gives requirements for welding and Part QB contains requirements for brazing. • Other Sections of the Code may specify different requirements than those specified by this Section. Such requirements take precedence over those of this Section, and the manufacturer or contractor shall comply with them. QW – 100.1 A Welding Procedure Specification•(WPS) is a written document that provides direction to the welder or welding operator for making production welds in accordance with Code requirements. •

When a WPS is to be prepared by the manufacturer or contractor, it must address, as a minimum, the specific variables, both essential and nonessential, as provided in Article II for each process to be used in production welding.

• As a minimum, the PQR shall document the essential variables and other specific information identified in Article II for each process used during welding the test coupon and the results of the required testing. QW – 100.2• In performance qualification, the basic criterion established for welder qualification is to determine the welder’s ability to deposit sound weld metal. • The purpose of the performance qualification test for the welding operator is to determine the welding operator’s mechanical ability to operate the welding equipment. QW – 141 Mechanical TestsMechanical tests used in procedure or performance qualification are as follows: QW – 141.1 Tension Tests …as described in QW-150 are used to determine the ultimate strength of groove-weld joints.

QW – 141.2 Guided-Bend Tests …as described in QW-160 are used to determine the degree of soundness and ductility of grooveweld joints.

QW – 142 Special Examinations for Welders•Radiographic examination may be substituted for mechanical testing of QW-141 for groove-weld performance qualification as permitted in QW-304 to prove the ability of welders to make sound welds. • Note Radiography can not be used to qualify a Welding Procedure. Only a welder can be tested by radiography and then only on the metals listed in QW-304

121

QW – 151.1 Reduced Section – Plate Reduced section specimens conforming to the requirements given in QW-462.1(a) may be used for tension tests on all thicknesses of plate. (a) For thicknesses up to and including 1 in a full thickness specimen shall be used for each required tension test. (b) For plate thickness greater than 1 in., full thickness specimens or multiple specimens may be used, provided QW-151.1(c) and QW-151.1(d) are complied with.

(c) When multiple specimens are used, in lieu of full thickness specimens, each set shall represent a single tension test of the full plate thickness. Collectively, all of the specimens required to represent the full thickness of the weld at one location shall comprise a set. (d) When multiple specimens are necessary, the entire thickness shall be mechanically cut into a minimum number of approximately equal strips of a size that can be tested in the available equipment. Each specimen of the set shall be tested and meet the requirements of QW-153 Example: 3.5” (89 mm) in 1” (25 mm) Capacity TS Machine

122

QW – 152 Tension Test ProceduresThe tension test specimen shall be ruptured under tensile load. The tensile strength shall be computed by dividing the ultimate total load by the least cross sectional area of the specimen as calculated from actual measurements made before the load is applied.

LOAD . . X

AREA SQ TENSILE INCHES (MM) STRENGTH

Example:

.750 width x .456 thick = .342 sq. inch (area) 24050 lbs/.342 sq. inch = 70,321.6 Pounds Sq. Inch

123

124

QW-153 Acceptance Criteria Tension Tests Minimum values for procedure qualification are provided under the column heading “Minimum Specified Tensile, ksi” of QW/QB- 422. In order to pass the tension test, the specimen shall have a tensile strength that is not less than: (a) the minimum specified tensile strength of the base metal; or (b) the minimum specified tensile strength of the weaker of the two, if base metals of different minimum tensile strengths are used; or… (c) the minimum specified tensile strength of the weld metal when the applicable Section provides for the use of weld metal having lower room temperature strength than the base metal; or… (d) if the specimen breaks in the base metal outside of the weld or weld interface, the test shall be accepted as meeting the requirements, provided the strength is not more than 5% below the minimum specified tensile strength of the base metal. (Note: (d) will be the acceptance paragraph for the majority of welding procedures and used during the WPS/PQR review.) QW – 163 Acceptance Criteria – Bend TestsThe weld and heat-affected zone of a transverse weldbend specimen shall be completely within the bent portion of the specimen after testing. The guided-bend specimens shall have no open discontinuities in the weld or heat-affected zone exceeding 1/8 in. (3.2 mm), measured in any direction on the convex surface of the specimen after bending. Open discontinuities occurring on the corners of the specimen during testing shall not be considered unless there is definite evidence that they result from lack of fusion, slag inclusions, or other internal discontinuities. QW-171 Notch Toughness Tests Charpy V-Notch QW-171.1 General Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be made when required by other Sections. Test procedures and apparatus shall conform to the requirements of SA-370. QW-171.2 Acceptance The acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with the Section specifying impact requirements. QW-171.3 Location and Orientation of Test Specimen The impact test specimen and notch location and orientation shall be as given in the Section requiring such tests.

125

QW-191 Radiographic Examination QW-191.1 Method (a) A written radiographic examination procedure is not required. (b) The requirements of T-285 Article 2 of Section V are to be used only as a guide. QW-191.2.2 Acceptance Standards Welder and welding operator performance tests by radiography of welds in test assemblies shall be judged unacceptable when the radiograph exhibits any imperfections in excess of the limits specified below. (a) Linear Indications (1) any type of crack or zone of incomplete fusion or penetration (2) any elongated slag inclusion which has a length greater than (a) 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) for t up to 3⁄8 in. (10 mm), inclusive (b) 1⁄3t for t over 3⁄8 in. (10 mm) to 21⁄4 in. (57 mm), inclusive (c) 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) for t over 21⁄4 in. (57 mm) (3) any group of slag inclusions in line that have an aggregate length greater than t in a length of 12t, except when the distance between the successive imperfections exceeds 6L where L is the length of the longest imperfection in the group QW-191.2.3 Production Welds•The acceptance standard for welding operators who qualify on production welds shall be that specified by the referencing Code Section. • The acceptance standard for welders who qualify on production welds as permitted by QW-304.1 shall be per QW-191.2.2.

126

Article II Welding Procedure Qualifications QW – 200.1 Each manufacturer and contractor shall prepare written Welding Procedure Specifications which are defined as follows: (a) Welding Procedure Specification (WPS). A WPS is a written qualified welding procedure prepared to provide direction for making production welds to Code requirements. (b) Contents of the WPS. The completed WPS shall describe all of the essential, nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essential variables (supplementary variables will not be on the exam) for each welding process used in the WPS.(c) Changes to the WPS. Changes may be made in the nonessential variables of a WPS to suit production requirements without requalification provided such changes are documented with respect to the essential, nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essential variables for each process. This may be by amendment to the WPS or by use of a new WPS. Changes in essential or supplementary essential (when required) variables require requalification of the WPS (new or additional PQR s to support the change in essential or supplementary essential variables). (d) Format of the WPS. The WPS may be in any format, written or tabular, to fit the needs of each manufacturer or contractor, as long as every essential, nonessential, and, when required (not required on the exam), supplementary essential variables outlined in QW-250 through QW280 is included or referenced. ** The WPS/PQR forms of Section IX are not mandatory. (e) Availability of the WPS. A WPS used for Code production welding shall be available for reference and review by the Authorized Inspector (AI) at the fabrication site.

127

QW – 200.2 Each manufacturer or contractor shall be required to prepare a procedure qualification record which is defined as follows. (a) Procedure Qualification Record (PQR). A PQR is a record of the welding data used to weld a test coupon. The PQR is a record of variables recorded during the welding of the test coupons. (b) Contents of the PQR. The completed PQR shall document all essential and, when required, supplementary essential variables of QW- 250 through QW-280 for each welding process used during the welding of the test coupon. Nonessential or other variables used during the welding of the test coupon may be recorded at the manufacturer’s or contractor’s option. (c) Changes to the PQR. Changes to the PQR are not permitted except as described below. It is a record of what happened during a particular welding test. Editorial corrections or addenda to the PQR are permitted. An example of an editorial correction is an incorrect P-Number, F-Number, or A-Number that was assigned to a particular base metal or filler metal. An example of an addendum would be a change resulting from a Code change. All changes to a PQR require recertification (including date) by the manufacturer or contractor. (New PQR form and signature) (e) Availability of the PQR. PQR’s used to support WPS’s shall be available, upon request, for review by the Authorized Inspector (AI).. (You have the right to review). The PQR need not be available to the welder or welding operator. (f) Multiple WPS s With One PQR/Multiple PQR s With One WPS. Several WPS’ s may be prepared from the data on a single PQR (e.g., a 1G plate PQR may support WPS’s for the F, V, H, and O positions on plate or pipe within all other essential variables). A single WPS may cover several essential variable changes as long as a supporting PQR exists for each essential and, when required, QW – 200.3To reduce the number of welding procedure qualifications required, P-Numbers are assigned to base metals dependent on characteristics such as composition, weldability, and mechanical properties, where this can logically be done; and for steel and steel alloys (QW/QB-422) Group Numbers are assigned additionally to P-Numbers. These Group Numbers classify the metals within P-Numbers for the purpose of procedure qualification where notch-toughness requirements are specified. (Group numbers are required on the PQR only when Charpy testing is required of the production welds).

128

QW-203 Limits of Qualified Positions for Procedures Unless specifically required otherwise by the welding variables (QW-250), a qualification in any position qualifies the procedure for all positions. The welding process and electrodes must be suitable for use in the positions permitted by the WPS. A welder or welding operator making and passing the WPS qualification test is qualified for the position tested. See QW-301.2. QW-211 Base Metal The base metals may consist of plate, pipe, or other product forms. Qualification in plate also qualifies for pipe welding and vice versa. Welding Processes on the Exam • • • •

Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) Gas Metal and Flux Core Arc Welding (GMAW –FCAW) Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW)

QW – 251 General QW – 251.1 Types of Variables for Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) These variables (listed for each welding process in QW-252 through QW-265) are subdivided into essential variables, supplementary essential variables, and nonessential variables (QW-401). The “Brief of Variables” listed in the Tables are for reference only. See the complete variable in Welding Data of Article IV. QW-251.2 Essential VariablesEssential variables are those in which a change, as described in the specific variables, is considered to affect the mechanical properties of the weldment, and shall require requalification of the WPS. Supplementary variables will not be on the exam WPS/PQR review questions. All of the welding processes recognized by Section IX have a table that is referred to as the Brief Of Variables. This Brief of Variables table references full explanations of each variable listed and the explanations are found in Article 4 of Section IX. Well go over some of these tabular variables for each process in order. QW-253 SMAW Take a look now at the top of QW-253 located on Notice the first row of variables listed are QW-402 Joints, with four entries, Groove design, Backing, Root spacing and, Retainers.

129

Also take notice of the Legend at the bottom of the page, which explains the symbols used with the variables of the tables QW-402.1 explains what is meant by this (a change) in groove design.

QW-253

130

SUPPLEMENTARY ESSENTIALS ARE NOT ON EXAM

131

The Basic Variables are Identical in most Processes – Joints – Base Metals

Some Variables are shared such as F-Number and some are unique to a Process – Flux Wire Class – Alloy Flux – Supplemental

You Should Study All Four Study the differences by reading the complete variable listings in Article IV for each of the processes. SMAW – SAW - GMAW/FCAW - GTAW

132

Article III Welding Performance QualificationsQW-300.1 This Article lists the welding processes separately, with the essential variables that apply to welder and welding operator performance qualifications. A welder or welding operator may be qualified by radiography of a test coupon, radiography of his initial production welding, or by bend tests taken from a test coupon except as stated in QW-304 and QW-305. QW-301.1 Intent of Tests The performance qualification tests are intended to determine the ability of welders and welding operators to make sound welds. QW-301.2 Qualification Tests •

The performance qualification test shall be welded in accordance with a qualified (WPS), except that when performance qualification is done in accordance with a WPS that requires preheat or postweld heat treatment, these may be omitted.

•

The welder or welding operator who prepares the WPS qualification test coupons meeting the requirements of QW-200 is also qualified within the limits of the performance qualifications, listed in QW-304 for welders and in QW-305 for welding operators.

•

He is qualified only within the limits for positions specified in QW-303.

QW-302.2 Radiographic Examinations When the welder or welding operator is qualified by radiographic examination,….., the minimum length of coupon (s) to be examined shall be 6 in. and shall include the entire weld circumference for pipe (s), except that for small diameter pipe, multiple coupons may be required, but the number need not exceed four consecutively made test coupons. The radiographic technique and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with QW-191. QW-304 Welders Each welder who welds under the rules of the Code shall have passed the mechanical and visual examinations prescribed in QW-302.1 and QW-302.4 respectively. Alternatively, welders making a groove weld using SMAW, SAW, GTAW, PAW, and GMAW (except short-circuiting mode) or a combination of these processes, may be qualified by radiographic examination, except for P-No. 21 through P-No. 25, P-No. 51 through P-No. 53, and P-No. 61 through PNo. 62 metals. Welders making groove welds in P-No. 21 through P-No. 25 and P-No. 51 through P-No. 53 metals with the GTAW process may also be qualified by radiographic examination. The radiographic examination shall be in accordance with QW-302.2. A welder qualified to weld in accordance with one qualified WPS is also qualified to weld in accordance with other qualified WPSs, using the same welding process, within the limits of the essential variables of QW-350. QW-304.1 Examination Welds made in test coupons for performance qualification may be examined by visual and mechanical examinations (QW-302.1, QW- 302.4) or by radiography (QW-302.2) for the process(es) and mode of arc transfer specified in QW-304. Alternatively, a 6 in. length of the first production weld made by a welder using the process (es) and/or mode of arc transfer specified in QW-304 may be qualified by radiography.

133

QW-304.2 Failure to Meet Radiographic Standards If a production weld is selected for welder performance qualification and it does not meet the radiographic standards, the welder has failed the test. In this event, the entire production weld made by this welder shall be radiographed and repaired by a qualified welder or welding operator. Alternatively, retests may be made as permitted in QW-320. QW-305.1 Examination Welds made in test coupons may be examined by radiography (QW-302.2) or by visual and mechanical examinations (QW-302.1, QW-302.4). Alternatively, a 3 ft (0.9 m) length of the first production weld made entirely by the welding operator in accordance with a qualified WPS may be examined by radiography. QW-321 Retests A welder or welding operator who fails one or more of the tests prescribed in QW-304 or QW-305, as applicable, may be retested under the following conditions. QW-321.1 Immediate Retest Visual ExamWhen the qualification coupon has failed the visual examination of QW-302.4, retesting shall be by visual examination before conducting the mechanical testing. • When an immediate retest is made, the welder or welding operator shall make two consecutive test coupons for each position which he has failed, all of which shall pass the visual examination requirements. (Two for One) QW-321.2 Immediate Retest Mechanical When the qualification coupon has failed the mechanical testing of QW-302.1, retesting shall be by mechanical testing. When an immediate retest is made, the welder or welding operator shall make two consecutive test coupons for each position which he has failed, … QW-321.3 Immediate Retest Radiography When the qualification coupon has failed the radiographic examination of QW-302.2, the immediate retest shall be by the radiographic examination method. (a) For welders and welding operators the retest shall be to radiographically examine two 6 in. plate coupons; for pipe, to examine two pipes for a total of 12 in. of weld, which shall include the entire weld circumference for pipe or pipes (for small diameter pipe the total number of consecutively made test coupons need not exceed eight). (Two for One) QW-322.1 Expiration of Qualification The performance qualification of a welder or welding operator shall be affected…occurs: (a) When he has not welded with a process during a period of 6 months or more, his qualifications for that process shall expire; unless, within the six month period, (1) a welder has welded using a manual or semiautomatic welding process which will maintain his qualification … (2) a welding operator has welded with a machine or automatic welding process which will maintain his….. (b) When there is a specific reason to question his ability to make welds that meet the specification, the qualifications …….and shall be revoked. All other qualifications not questioned remain in effect.

134

QW-322.2 Renewal of Qualification (a) Renewal of qualification expired under QW-322.1(a) above may be made for any process by welding a single test coupon of either plate or pipe, of any material, thickness or diameter, in any position, and by testing of that coupon as required by QW-301 and QW-302. (b) Welders and welding operators whose qualifications have been revoked under QW-322.1(b) above shall requalify. Qualification shall utilize a test coupon appropriate to the planned production work. The coupon shall be welded and tested as required by QW-301 and QW-302. Successful test restores the qualification. QW-353 Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW) Essential Variables Using SMAW as the process the Paragraph Brief of Variables follows: Notice the welder has only essential variables, where as the WPS/PQR can have both essential and nonessential variables.

135

Article IV Welding Data QW – 401 General A change from one welding process to another welding process is an essential variable and requires requalification. QW – 401.1 Essential Variables (Procedure) A change in a welding condition which will affect the mechanical properties (other than notch toughness) of the weldment (for example, change in P-Number, welding process, filler metal, electrode, preheat or Postweld heat treatment, etc.). QW – 401.2 Essential Variable Performance A change in a welding condition which will affect the ability of a welder to deposit sound weld metal (such as a change in welding process, deletion of backing, electrode, F-Number, technique, etc.). Supplemental Essential Variables are not on the Exam. QW – 401.4 Nonessential Variable Procedure A change in a welding condition which will not affect the mechanical properties of a weldment (such as joint design, method of back gouging or cleaning, etcetera). QW-402.1Here are examples of complete descriptions of two non-essential variables that correspond to the blocks on the SMAW QW-253 Brief of Variables. A change in the type of groove (Vee groove, U-groove, single-bevel, double-bevel, etcetera). QW-402.2 The addition or deletion of a backing

136

P and S Numbers will be limited to Welding Only

137

QW-422 P-Number and S-Numbers About 52 Pages

138

QW-424

139

Filler Metal Number Listings

140

7 Pages of Filler Metal Numbers

141

This table lists what a welder is qualified for based on F-Number used during a test

142

QW-433 all other F-numbers are listed in this table

143

QW-451.1

Diameter Limitations for Welders

144

QW-461.4 Welding Test Positions for Plate and Pipe Groove Welds

145

QW-461.9 Summary of Welder's Qualifications Based on Type of Test

146

Section 13 Writing a Welding Procedure Specification

Lesson 13 Writing a Welding Procedure Specification SECTION IX Qualifying a Welding Procedure by Essential Variables When qualifying a welding procedure you must first determine the important properties of the planned weldment which then become the essential variables. The basic ones are: •Base metal to be welded and thickness (T) required. •Process (es) to be used including filler metal (s). •Preheat. •Postweld heat treatment or the lack thereof. •Various others specific to the welding process used. For this instruction we will use the SMAW Process. The brief of Essential, Supplementary Essential and Non-Essential Variables for the SMAW process are listed in table QW-253. However this part of the course will only cover Essential Variables not the supplementary or non-essentials. The non-essentials will be covered latter. A definition of these variables follows. Essential Variable – A variable that if changed requires requalification of the procedure by the welding and testing of a new coupon or support from a previously qualified Procedure Qualification Record (PQR), i.e. a change in the base metal thickness (T) qualified. Supplementary Essential – An essential variable that is used only when impact testing of a base metal is required by a construction code, i.e. a change from one P-No Group to another such as P1 Gr.1 to Gr.2 Non-Essential – A variable that can be changed as needed to suit production requirements without requalification. A change in the groove design, etc.

147

QW-253 SMAW Brief of Variables We will start our discussion with the top half of the SMAW brief of variables, beginning with the first two Essential Variables, Base Metal and Filler Metal.

Notice that each variable references a paragraph in Article 4. For example under Base Metals we have the entry T/t Limits > 8 inches which is referenced to paragraph QW-403.7 Defining Each Essential Variable Base Metals QW-403.7 •

T/t Limits > 8 inches - this rule only applies at thickness greater than 8 inches (203 mm) .

•

Unless you will be welding something over 8 inches this is of little concern. The rule for most welding procedures is the maximum that can be welded is 2 times T (the coupon). If you are welding a coupon over 8 inches you are restricted to 1.33T or 1.33t, as applicable. 1.33t is the weld metal thickness, it matters when mixing welding processes and/or filler metal F-Numbers.

148

Base Metals • Change in Thickness (T) qualified. • QW-403.8 A change in base metal thickness beyond the range qualified in QW-451, except as otherwise permitted by QW-202.4(b) (different thickness at the joint) • Of concern is the thickness range qualified by the supporting PQR (s) for the WPS, from less than a 1/16” to less than 1-1/2” it is 2 x T. To weld a thickness outside the range supported by the PQR the WPS production welding changes must be supported by providing an additional PQR from file or by welding a new PQR test coupon. • t (weld metal) pass greater than 1/2” • QW-403.9 For single-pass or multi-pass welding in which any pass (means layer of weld metal) is greater than 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick, an increase in base metal thickness beyond 1.1 times that of the qualification test coupon. • The thickness range is affected. It will be restricted to 1.1 T as given above if you deposit more than 1/2” of weld metal in a single pass (layer). This has to do with heat input. A single pass refers to the number of weld beads required to fill up a layer of weld metal in the joint. If the single layer/pass, t (deposited weld metal), exceeds 1/2” in thickness the WPS will be restricted to 1.1 x T in production welding.

149

Alternate Base Metals for Procedures • QW-403.11 • Base metals specified in the WPS shall be qualified by a procedure qualification test which was made using base metals in accordance with QW-424. Base Metal (s) Used for Procedure Qualification Test Coupon Versus Base Metal Qualified for production

150

Let’s examine some of the items in the table.One Metal from a P-No to Any Metal from the Same P-No such as P1 to P1 which qualifies all P1 metals, i.e. pipe and/or plate.

One metal from a P-No to any metal from any other P-No, we will Use P-No.1 to P- No.8 as an example. Other combinations are possible, P Nos. 1 to 3, P Nos.3 to 4 etc.

One metal from P-No 3 To any other metal from P-No. 3

One metal from P No. 3 to any other metal from P No. 3 Also qualifies P No. 3 to P No. 1.

However, one metal from P No. 3 to any metal from P No. 3 does not qualify P No. 1 to P No. 1

151

One metal from P-No.4 to any other metal from P-No.4

One metal from P No.4 to any other metal from P No.4 also qualifies P No.4 to 4, 3 and, 1.

It qualifies one metal from P No. 4 to any metal from P No. 4, 3 or 1, but does not qualify P No. 3 to P No. 3 or P No. 1 to P No.1

152

Base Metals • Change of P-No. 5/9/10 • QW-403.13 A change from one P No. 5 to any other P-No. 5 (P-No. 5A to P-No. 5B or P-No. 5C or vice versa). A change from P-No. 9A to P-No. 9B but, not vice versa. A change from one P- No.10 to any other P-No.10 (P-No.10A to P- No.10B or P-No.10C, etc., or vice versa). • Simple, P-No. 5/9/10 - A,B,C.., are different P-Numbers and will require individual qualifications, (with the exception of going from 9B to 9A)Filler Metals • Change of F-Number • QW-404.4 A change from one F-Number in QW-432 to any other F-Number or to any other filler metal not listed in QW-432. • Changing the F-Number on the WPS to one other than that used for the procedure test coupon (PQR). Such as changing from F-No. 1 to F-No. 3. • This rule also applies to a welder’s qualification test by the way.• QWNumber

404.5

Change

of

A-

• A-Nos. are the chemical analysis’ of the ferrous weld metal deposits produced by a given filler metal. Changing A numbers can change the chemistry and possibly the mechanical properties of the weldment. It also changes the weld add mixture, that part that contains both base metal and weld metal. This occurs when changing filler metals. Changing the A No. to one other than that used to qualify requires a new test or additional PQR (s) from a file (with one exception). And we find the following rule, proving you must read Section IX completely!• QW-404.5 (Applicable only to ferrous metals.) A change in the chemical composition of the weld deposit from one A-Number to any other A-Number in QW- 442. Qualification with A-No. 1 shall qualify for will force requalification).

A-No. 2 and vice versa. (Note: all other A- No. changes

153

The dot dot dot in table below indicates not specified to be present, single values are maximums. i.e. Carbon is limited to 0.20 % maximum for A-No.1

Filler Metals Consider the following filler metals for the SMAW process. 1. E-7018 which has an A-Number of 1. 2. E-7018A1 which has an A-Number of 2 Compare the chemistry tables of the IX A–Nos. to Section II Part C Filler Metals and to a Hobart filler metal manufacturer Data Sheet.

154

From Section IX QW-442 A No. 1 by Max. % C 0.20/ Cr…/ Mo…/ Ni…/ Mn 1.60/ Si 1.00 From Section II Part C / E-7018 SFA 5.1

A No. 1 contains by % C 0.20/ Cr…/ Mo…/ Ni…/ Mn 1.60/ Si 1.00 Hobart’s Data Sheet for E-7018

155

Comparing All Three for E-7018

C 0.20 Cr --A-No. 1

Mo ---

Ni ---

Mn 1.60 Si 1.00

Section IX

C… Cr 0.20 Mo 0.30 Ni 0.30 SFA- 5.1

Mn 1.60 Si 0.75

Sect. II C

C 0.07

Cr .043 Mo .009 Ni .019

Hobart

Data

Mn 0.88 Si 0.37

From the Section IX QW-442 A No. 2 by Max. % C 0.15 / Cr 0.50/ Mo 0.40 – 0.65/ Ni…/ Mn 1.60/ Si 1.00 From Section II Part C / E-7018A1 SFA 5.5

A No. 2 contains by Max % C 0.15 / Cr 0.50/ Mo 0.40 – 0.65/ Ni…/ Mn 1.60/ Si 1.00

156

Hobart’s Data Sheet for E-7018A1

Comparing All Three for E-7018A1

C 0.15 Cr 0.50 Mo Ni… A-No. 2 0.40Section IX 0.65 C 0.12 Cr… Mo Ni… SFA- 5.5 0.40Sect. II C 0.65 C 0.04 Cr… Mo 0.43 Ni… Hobart

Data

Mn 1.60 Si 1.00 Mn 0.90 Si 0.80 Mn 0.81 Si 0.44

A note on the API ExamsIf you are taking any of the three API Exams you will be required to review a WPS and PQR. Part of that review might be a question about the A-Number listed for the filler metal in the documents. This is a protest question. You would need ASME Section II Part C to answer that question. Sect. II Part C is not listed as required for the exam. You have no way of answering!

157

Filler Metals • Change in the deposited t • QW-404.30 A change in deposited weld metal thickness beyond the range qualified in QW-451 for procedure qualification. • Example: In a SMAW procedure 1/4” of E-6010 was qualified on the PQR by depositing 1/8” in the coupon (2t), the balance of the coupon was filled with E 7018. The need arises to increase the E6010 weld metal t to 3/8” in production. This would require a new coupon or an existing PQR. Preheat

• A decrease in preheat greater than 100o F • QW-406.1 A decrease of more than 100°F (38°C) in the preheat temperature qualified. The minimum temperature for welding shall be as specified in the WPS. • Example: A PQR coupon was welded with preheat of 250°F (121°C) but the WPS requires a preheat of only 100°F (38°C). This is a 150°F (66°C) decrease below that qualified and will require a new PQR or one from your files to support the lower temperature.

158

PWHT • Change in PWHT • QW-407.1 This long paragraph specifies what is considered a change in post weld heat treatments. The changes are P-Number specific with 5 different conditions of PWHT for P Nos. 1,3, 4, 5, 6, 9,10 and, 11. For most of those and all other materials there are two conditions: 1. No PHWT 2. The specified PWHT for the P No. used based on a construction Code. • T Limits (Thickness Limits) • QW-407.4 For a procedure qualification test coupon receiving a post weld heat treatment in which the upper transformation temperature is exceeded, the maximum qualified thickness for production welds is 1.1 times the thickness of the test coupon. • This rule only applies when a production weld will undergo heat treatment at temperature that will alter the base metal’s physical properties, such as normalizing, etc.

159

Producing the PQR We have looked at all of the essential variables for the SMAW process. Let’s put it all together by filling out a SMAW PQR to support a Welding Procedure Specification (WPS). To do this it will be necessary to specify a list of the essential variables for the welding we have planned. From QW-253 we need to address the basic essential variables and the ranges to be used: 1. Base Metal (s) – 2” SA-516 Gr. 70 P-No. 1 2. Filler Metal (s) – E-7018 Only 3. Preheat – 175 o F for P-No.1 (from Sect. VIII Div. 1 non-mandatory Appendix R) 4. PWHT – 1100 o F Minimum per inch of thickness for P-No. 1 (from Sect. VIII Div. 1 UCS-56) First we will fill out the top half of the PQR from the company name to the base metal information on the left side and include a graphic of the joint design used to weld the coupon.

Next we will fill out the bottom half of the PQR with the filler metal and preheat on the left side. While not required on the PQR by Section IX the Non-Essential variables will be entered as well.

160

Now we will fill out the upper half of the PQR with the PWHT metal on the right side. Making the comment Not Applicable in the box for Gas, since the SMAW process does not use shielding gasses

Finally the bottom right, which consists of all non-essential variables. Once again these are not required by Section IX, but may be helpful for meeting a construction code requirement, i.e. Section VIII Div. 1 or B31.3.

161

Now we start completing the back of the PQR. To do so we need some test results for our required tension and bend tests. The tension test specimens are fabricated as given in Section IX QW-462.1(a).

. The required number of tension test specimens are 2 as shown in Section IX QW-451.1 The required number of tension specimens are always two, when your coupon exceeds 1”, you are allowed divide the two specimens into multiple pieces. (see QW-151.1 (c) and (d)) The ultimate strength of the tension specimens must be computed as described in QW-152.

162

•QW-152 Tension Test Procedure The tension test specimen shall be ruptured under tensile load. The tensile strength shall be computed by dividing the ultimate total load by the least cross sectional area of the specimen as calculated from actual measurements made before the load is applied. We must measure each specimen’s width and thickness after machining as shown in QW-462.1(a). Section IX requires two specimens be tested. The data for our specimens was; TS1 - width = .750” thickness = .453” TS2 - width = .753” thickness = .456” Area for each specimen. TS1= .750 x.453 = .340 in.2 TS2= .753 x.456 = .343 in.2 We put the specimens in a tensile tester and pull each one apart;

163

The specimens were broke in the tensile tester and the breaking forces as read from the gage on the machine were recorded as follows; TS1 = 25,010 Lbs. TS2 = 24,050 Lbs. Computing the ultimate strength for 1 square inch for each specimen; ‘Load divided by Area’ 25,010/.340 = 73,558 PSI 24,050/.343 = 70,116 PSI We now evaluate the specimens;‘Load divided by Area’ 25,010/.340 = 73,558 PSI 24,050/.343 = 70,116 PSI

Observing the character and location of the specimen failures, it was noted that both failed in the base metal outside of the weld heat affected zones and in a ductile manner. We can now record this information on the back side of our Procedure Qualification Record. ‘

164

But First’ We must determine the required minimum specified strength from Section IX in the P-Number listings. We find that SA-516 Grade 70 has a Minimum Specified Tensile Strength of: 70 KSI = 70,000 Pounds Per Square Inch.

Our tensile specimens exceeded the minimum. Now we have one more task to complete. We must do 4 side bend tests. This requirement is found in Section IX along with the accept/reject values for all bend tests. The required type and number of bend tests based on a 1” thick coupon are 4 Side Bend tests. Side bends are mandatory after the coupon thickness reaches 3/4” or larger.

We must evaluate the bend specimens to section IX QW-163.

165

QW-163 -

The guided-bend specimens shall have no open discontinuity in the weld or heat-affected zone exceeding 1/8 in. (3.2 mm), measured in any direction on the convex surface of the specimen after bending. Open discontinuities….etc.

To see the details for making the bend specimens look at QW-462.2

166

We evaluated the bend specimens to section IX and had the following comments. Side Bend S1. No open defects acceptable Side Bend S2. 1/32” acceptable Side Bend S3. No open defects acceptable Side Bend S4. No open defects acceptable We have the correct type based on the coupon thickness and the correct number of acceptable side bend tests.We can now fill out the top back of the PQR.

All that is left is to fill out the bottom of the back of the PQR. This will be easy, just a few housekeeping items to complete.

167

Here is the front side of the complete Procedure Qualification Record

168

Here is the back side of the complete Procedure Qualification Record

169

The WPS We have completed the Procedure Qualification Record, which is a laboratory report of the welding and testing of a coupon. • From this PQR we will write a Welding Procedure Specification. It must be in complete agreement concerning Essential Variables with the PQR.• The Welding Procedure Specification, must be complete. You must address all of the essential, supplementary essential (if Notch toughness testing is required), and non-essential variables. The best approach is to use of the Brief of Variables found in QW-253 on as an item check list. • We will go line by line and address all of the Essential and Non-Essential variables only and since our WPS will not require toughness testing, Supplementary Essentials will be omitted.

Starting in box QW-402 we will address each of the non-essential variables. •

•Groove Design

•

•Backing

•

•Root Spacing

•

•Retainers

170

The following is how it was completed.

In box QW-402 we have addressed each of the non-essential variables as follows; • Groove Design – Single Vee, Double Vee, J-Groove and, U-Groove • Backing – The X in both the Yes and No boxes denotes that this WPS may be used with or without backing. • Root Spacing –This is given below Details. • Retainers – Also given below Details. Since we have addressed each of the non-essential variables and thereby giving all the needed Joint information for making a weldment, it is complete for joint design and no one should have to ask what is allowed when using this WPS. Notice that BWC-112A is referenced for the actual details of the various joints, such as included angle of Vee grooves and depths of J and U grooves.

171

Next QW-403 Base Metals

We have addressed each of the essential variables under Base Metal QW-403. It is complete for P-No., Thickness range and the restriction of No t Pass > 1/2” has been addressed. Supplementary Essentials need not be addressed, since no impact testing is required of this weldment. Next QW-404 Filler Metals

We have addressed each of the essential variables under Filler Metal QW-404. It is complete for AWS Classification, F-No., A-No., Size of Filler Metals, and Weld Metal Thickness Range and all essential variable entries are correct.

172

Next the back and top of the WPS We will now complete the Positions, Preheat, Electrical, and Postweld Heat Treatment on the WPS.

173

1. The Positions for use with this WPS are, Flat, Horizontal, Vertical and, Overhead. This instructs that this WPS can be used with all positions. 2. The Preheat minimum is set at 100oF (38oC) which is within 100oF of the PQR actual value of 175oF. 3. The Preheat Maintenance specified as none required. The Electrical Characteristics are; 1. Direct Current Electrode Positive. 2. Amps (I) are set to a range of 90-190 and the Volts (E) are set to a range of 15-25, these values are normally obtained from the filler metal manufacturer’s literature or from actual experience. 3. The rest are not required for SMAW. The Postweld Heat Treatment values are: 1.1150 +/- 50oF (621+/- 10oC) which is in agreement with the PQR minimum value of 1100oF (593oC) 2. Time at temperature is 1 hour, also in agreement with the PQR. 3. Gas variables are not required for SMAW.

174

We will now complete the bottom half of the back of the WPS, which consists of the Technique box QW410!

1. String or Weave, restricted from 2 to 3 core diameters (core wire exclusive of any coating). 2. Cleaning is limited to Brushing or Grinding. Back Gouging will be by Air Carbon Arc. 3. Multiple Pass, Single Electrode (not required), but often entered. Manual is entered in the heading of the WPS and Peening is listed as not allowed. 4. All others are not SMAW variables.

175

The Complete WPS Front

176

The Complete WPS Back

177

Section 14 Welder Performance Qualification Test

Lesson 14 Welder Performance Qualification Test SECTION IX Welder’s Qualifications / Essential Variables. We will discuss all of the welder’s essential variables listed in QW-353 for the SMAW process. Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW) Essential Variables

Brief of Variables

Paragraph QW 402 Joints QW 403 Base Metals QW 404 Filler Metals QW 405 Positions

.4

Deletion of Backing

.16 .18

Change Pipe Diameter Change in P Number

.15 .30

Change in F Number Change in weld t deposited

.1 .3

Addition of a position Change from vertical Up to Down or Down to UP progression

The first essential variable listed is – Backing (Removal of). If a welder is qualified using any type of backing, and asked to perform an open root weld he must retest without backing to be qualified to perform the welding. The Code definition of backing is welding with a backing bar or retainer, welding double sided welds where the weld metal of the first pass is used after gouging/grinding as weld metal backing for the balance of the weld. Fillet and partial penetration welds are also considered welding with backing.The next inline is a change in Pipe Diameter qualified. As pipe diameters become smaller the difficulty for a welder is increased resulting in a higher skill level requirement. So this translates to a change in diameter to one smaller than qualified by the welder’s pipe coupon on a previous test with this process.

178

The ranges of pipe diameters qualified are given in Section IX, QW-452.3 GROOVE-WELD DIAMETER LIMITS

As we can see: 1. Under 1 inch (25mm) qualifies the diameter down to the size welded to unlimited diameter, because it is only easier for the welder as the diameter of the Pipe welded increases. 2. From 1 inch (25mm) to 2-7/8 inch (73mm) qualifies 1 inch to unlimited. 3. Over 2-7/8 inch (73mm) qualifies 2-7/8 inch to unlimited.

QW-353 - Welder Essential Variables P-Numbers

P-Numbers serve to group metals by mechanical and chemical properties. So it is reasonable to think that not all metals can be welded using the same technique, or have the same level of difficulty for welders. There are three basic P-No groupings for welder qualifications. If a welder changes to a P-No. group that he/she has not qualified for then a retest is required. We will have a more thorough lesson on Alternate Base Metals later in this course. QW-432 - F Numbers

We have now arrived at the Filler Metal Number or F- Number. F- Numbers are a grouping of electrodes and filler metals that weld in a similar way and in general present more or less difficulty for a welder. In other words some F-Number filler metals require different skills than others and must be qualified individually in most cases.The table of F Numbers coming up is read in the following way… • EXX18 stands for all SMAW electrodes ending in 18 such as E-7018, E-7018-A1, 8018-B1 etc. So all of the above are F-Number 4 • EXX10 would be E-6010 with an F-Number of 3 • The XX is the tensile strength 70,000 PSI

179

Finding F-Numbers

180

QW-433 Alternate F-Numbers for Welder Performance Qualifications

Changing the F Number for a welder may affect his ability to weld and require requalification. There are some provisions for using lower F-Numbers when qualifying with numbers 2 to 4 but, there are restrictions on those qualifications.

Examples

1. Using the table QW-433, if a welder qualifies without backing with an electrode assigned to FNumber 4. What F-Numbers can they use with backing in a production weld? 2. What F Numbers can they weld without backing? Notice that the large table only addresses F-Numbers 1 through 5. The rest of the F-Numbers are in a small table along with notes beneath the large table. Let’s have a look at those.

181

QW-433 Alternate F-Numbers for Welders

182

The column ‘Thickness t, of weld metal in the coupon’ refers to the amount of weld metal from a process or a filler metal. Perhaps a bit of E-6010 and the rest E-7018 or perhaps GTAW root and SMAW fill passes and cap. Example: Assume one welding process,

SMAW and one electrode E-7018 using a P-No.1 pipe A coupon thickness of 3/8 inch was welded using E-7018. In the column on the right titled ‘Thickness of weld metal qualified’ we see 2t, so 2 x 3/8” = 3/4” this is the maximum amount of E-7018 (F-No. 4) , that the welder can deposit in production. Suppose now the coupon is 1/2” thick and a welder welds it with 100% E-7018 using 3 weld layers, we see that welder’s limit of deposited weld metal with an F-No.4 is the maximum to be welded. Another combination in the 1/2” coupon

1/8” of E-6010 (F-No.3) and 3/8” of E-7018, by the first column 2 x 1/8” = 1/4” of E-6010 (F-No.3) and 2 x 3/8” = 3/4” of 7018 (F-No.4) The welder can deposit up to 1/4” of any F-No.3 and 3/4” of any F-No.4 with any production WPS he is otherwise fully qualified for, meaning position, diameter, P-No., backing, progression etc.

183

The next essential variable listed is Position. Consider the welding positions versus the welder test positions for a moment. We will use pipe test coupons. Positions for pipe tests are designated by an alphanumeric such as 1G, 1 designates the coupon orientation, in this example the pipe is on the horizontal and is rotated/rolled beneath the welder and is considered to be flat welding. The G means a groove butt weld. The others are 2G, 5G and, 6G. Turn to QW-461.4 in Section IX.QW-461.4 - Groove Welds in Pipe – Test Positions

The more difficult the test position, the more positions a welder can perform. The four positions for welding are Flat, Horizontal, Vertical and Overhead. These are referred to as: F, H, V, and O

There are corresponding pipe and plate test positions that qualify a welder for F, V, H, and O. We will use pipe in the examples. 1G qualifies F (Rotated) 2G qualifies H 5G qualifies F, V, and O 6G qualifies F, V, H, and O (this yields all positions) Section IX allows combining test positions to produce an all position welder. Therefore if a welder tests in 2G and 5G he/she was tested for all positions. 2G covers H and 5G covers F, V, and O

This is equal to 6G that qualifies F, V, H, and O Either of these two yields an all positions welder.

184

QW-469.1 - Performance Qualifications - Position and Diameter Limitations

All of this information is compiled into one table. In this way you can go straight to a one page table and review a Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ) for position and diameter qualifications.

Notice the entry on the top row right 185

Position and Type Weld Qualified. [Note (1)]

Below that Groove Below Groove exists two sub-headings Plate and Pipe Over 24 inches and Pipe less than or equal to 24 inches.

Ignoring Fillets because any welder qualified for groove 1G is qualified for the same fillet 1F.

To the left we have Qualification Test This has the sub-headings Weld and Position We will use the Pipe-Groove [Note (3)] row . Starting at the top of the table in the Qualification Test column move down and stop at the 1G entry below. To the right we see the entries F F F ignore fillets. Move up at the first F and find Plate and Pipe over 24 in. O.D. is qualified Move up from the second F and find Pipe less than or equal to 24 in. O.D. is qualified. See [Note (3)] Pipe less than or equal to 24 in O.D. is qualified. See [Note (3)] Note (3) See diameter restrictions in QW-452.3, QW-452.4, and QW-452.6 notice that while the welder can weld on pipe in the “position qualified” they are still restricted by the diameters given in the table below on Pipe less than or equal to 24 in O.D. The last essential variable listed is Progression. This is as simple as it gets.

If a welder welds Vertically Up (Uphill) during a particular test he is only qualified for vertically up. Should the welder be required to weld Vertically Down (Downhill) he will be required to weld a test coupon (keeping other variables the same) welding Vertically Down. The reverse is also true, qualify Downhill and you must weld another coupon to qualify Uphill.The next series of slides address the alternate base materials for welder qualifications. As you will see a welder can test for example on a P-No.1 base material with a selected F-No. Filler metal and, under the rules of Section IX he can weld many other P-Numbers using the F-No. Used for the test, maintaining all the other essential variables for the welder, position, diameter, etc.

186

QW 423 –Alternate Base Materials for Welder Qualification versus Base Metal Qualified

Base metals used for welder qualification may be substituted for the metal specified in the WPS in accordance with the following in-text table.When a base metal in the left column is used for welder qualification, the welder is qualified to weld all combinations of base metals in the right column including unassigned metals of similar composition to these metals. Warning

Base Metal (s) Used for Welder Qualification

Base Metal (s) for which the Welder is Qualified

P-No. 1 through P-No. 11, PNo. 34, or P-No. 41 through P-No. 47

P-No. 1 through P-No. 11, PNo. 34, or P-No. 41 through P-No. 47

P-No. 21 through P-No. 25

P-No. 21 through P-No. 25

P-No. 51 through P-No. 53 or PNo. 61 through P-No. 62

P-No. 51 through P-No. 53 or PNo. 61 through P-No. 62

187

So, all we need to do is qualify a welder to weld any P-No from the list and he can weld all of the others. This would be great! There is however a problem with this theory. Welders are also limited by the Filler Metal Number (F-No.) used during a test. If a welder qualifies on any P-Number from P 1 through P 11, P 34 or P 41 through P47 he/she is qualified to weld any of those metals together. Be warned - this is further limited by the F-number (s)!

If a welder qualifies on P 21 to P 25 they are qualified to weld any of these metals together or any combination of these aluminum alloys together!

If a welder qualifies on P 51 to P 53 or P 61 to 62 the welder is qualified to weld any of these metals together or in any combination of Titanium or Zirconium alloy!

In theory a welder could be qualified for all the listed base materials by welding just three (3) coupons. Remember our lesson on Filler Metal Numbers (F-Numbers). This is where the welder's limitations become very important. One of the essential variables for a welder is the F- Number of the electrode he qualifies with during a given test. Suppose a welder qualifies with SMAW using an F-No.4 electrode the test coupon is a P-No.1 base material. The welder has qualified to weld P No. 1 to 11, 34 or 41 through 47. So let’s have him weld one of the nickels, a P-No.41. Assume it will be required to make the weld with a filler metal that is designated as a F-No.41 in Section IX. There is a problem, he has not qualified any of those metals with a F-No.41 filler metal. He would have to prove his skill with the F-No.41 filler metal.The welder is qualified for SMAW using a F-No.4 electrode not F-No.41. The welder will have to test again on any of those metals using a SMAW electrode designated as a F-No.41, why because the F-Numbers 4 and 41 are considered to require different skill levels to weld. The F-Number is a welder’s essential variable as well as the procedures. Welders are limited by all of the following essential variables (skill issues), which are in Section IX for the welding processes listed.

188

QW-353 - Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW) Essential Variables

Paragraph QW 402 Joints QW 403 Base Metals QW 404 Filler Metals QW 405 Positions

.4

Brief of Variables Deletion of Backing

.16 .18

Change Pipe Diameter Change in P Number

.15 .30 .1 .3

Change in F Number Change in weld metal t deposited Addition of a position Change from vertical Up to Down or Down to UP progression

Simply put the welder must qualify all of their essential variables, not just be qualified to weld a particular P-Number. In our example he/she is disqualified for the nickel alloy weld because of the required F-Number qualification being F-No.41 as listed on the WPS/PQR.A welder is limited by, process, pipe diameter, P- Number, F- Number, weld metal thickness, position, backing and progression. All of these Essential Variables must meet the requirements of the WPS to be used in the production weld.Destructive Testing of Welder’s Qualification CouponsThere are three items that must be addressed when performing destructive testing of a welder’s test coupon. 1. The type of the specimens required? 2. How many specimens are required? 3. Where in the test coupon specimens shall be taken from? These items are listed in Article IV Welding Data of Section IX in a tabular form, 452.1(a) and are accompanied by notes referencing paragraphs found in Article III, of Section IX .The type and number a listed in that paragraph.

189

Notice that the notes underneath the table do the following things: General Note: Defines the “Thickness of the Weld Metal” and disallows using the reinforcement as part of the thickness deposited. Note 1 Specifies the number of coupons used for the listed welder pipe groove test positions, and thereby differentiates pipe from plate coupons. Note 2 Coupons tested by face and root bends. Limits the type of weld bend coupons that can be used when doing combination welder or process tests a single coupon, combinations outside of this description will require side bends. Note 3 Allows the substitution of side bends for face and root when the coupon is 3/8” to less than 3/4”. We will now examine the figures referenced in QW-452.1(a) for removal of Welder’s Performance Coupons.

190

191

Next an example of the coupons required for a 2G and 5G test in a single coupon which will qualify a welder for all four of the positions, Flat, Horizontal, Vertical and, Overhead just the same as the single 6G test. This coupon requires 6 bend specimens instead of the usual 4, taken from the locations indicated in the graphic.

192

We will now examine the figures referenced in QW-452.1(b) for Welder’s “Thickness of Weld Metal (t) Qualified”.

193

Notice that the welder must deposit at least 1/2” in a minimum of three layers/passes to be qualified for unlimited thickness in production. All thickness below 1/2” follows the 2 x t rule. Example:

The welder deposits 3/8” he is qualified to weld up to 3/4” in production welding with the process and filler metal used during his test. Also, as stated previously in addition he will be limited by diameter, progression, backing and, position.Combination tests are described in notes 1, 2, and, 3. Example: Note 1: Two welders deposit 1/2” each both used three layers in a single 10” Schedule 140, 1” thick coupon with SMAW F-No 4 electrodes. They will each be qualified to weld unlimited thickness in production with that process and F-No using the position, progression, backing and, diameter used during the test. They could also have used different F-Numbers and/or processes and could have been qualified unlimited thickness based on the test they performed. Example: Note 2: Two welders deposit 1/2” each both used three layers in a single 1” thick coupon with SMAW FNo 4 electrodes. They will each be qualified to weld unlimited thickness in production with that process and F-No using the position, progression, backing and, diameter used during the test. They could also have used different F-No. s and/or processes and would have been qualified unlimited thickness base on the test they performed. Example: Note 3:

Two welders deposit 1/2” each both used three layers in a single 1” thick coupon with SMAW F-No 4 electrodes. They will each be qualified to weld unlimited thickness in production with that process and F-No using the position, progression, backing and, diameter used during the test. They could also have used different F-Numbers and/or processes and would have been qualified unlimited thickness base on the test they performed.

Example - Billy Bob Welder’s performance test was made under the following conditions using Big Welding Company’s WPS CW-1010

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

P Number 1 Pipe Coupon Pipe Diameter NPS 8” (8.625”) Thickness 0.500” 6G Position Uphill Progression F No 4 (SFA 5.1) 3 layers of Weld Metal Process SMAW Only

194

Next we fill out the of Welder’s Performance Qualification Form QW-484 (WPQ) for Billy Bob Welder.

195

Remember, a welder has only Essential Variables and for SMAW they are: 1. P-Number 2. F-Number 3. Diameter 4. Backing, with or without and, without qualifies both for a given F-Number and lower F-Numbers in some instances 5. Vertical Progression (Uphill or Downhill) 6. Position (most difficult tested for) 7. Weld Metal thickness (greatest thickness)

196

Section 15 Review of WPS’s and PQR’s

Lesson 15 Review of WPS’s and PQR’s

The API candidate will be given a WPS and a PQR and will be asked to identify errors or unsupported requirements. Questions will be asked about individual blocks on the WPS/PQR. You will not be required to review the entire document. The exam is in multiple choice format, normally 3 to 6 questions come from the WPS/PQR review. When answering the questions about the WPS and/or the PQR, look for omitted information. Every Essential and Nonessential variable should be addressed. Common errors, such as filler metal FNumbers and base metal thickness ranges are typically found. The PQR test coupon thickness T can and often does support only part of the thickness range stated on the WPS etc. Limitations on the WPS/PQR Review

The API Body of Knowledge has limited the content of the WPS and PQR in the following key ways. 1. There will be only one welding process, and they have been limited to SMAW, GTAW, GMAW or SAW. 2. Just one filler metal i.e. all E-7018 with no mixing of F- Numbers. 3. There will not be different thicknesses or different base metals welded to each other. 4. The P-Numbers are limited to P1, P3, P4, P5 and, P8 5. For P1, P3, P4, and, P5 the lower transition temperature is 1,333°F and the upper is transformation is 1600°F. 6. Supplemental powdered fillers or consumable inserts will not be on the WPS/PQR. 7. Special welding processes such as corrosion resistant weld metal overlay and hard surfacing will not be present. 8. Welds with buttering of the ferritic member or excluded. In short the WPS/PQR review will be of the most basic type, and will not require a great deal of expertise in Section IX. WPS/PQR Mistakes are of Four Types

1. Missing variables, both Essentials and Non-Essentials on the WPS. 2. Missing Essential variables on the PQR, Non-Essentials are not required for the PQR. 3. Incorrect Essential Variables, such as the wrong F-Number for a filler metal or electrode. For example: “The electrode E-6010 has an F-Number of 3 and often the wrong F-Number is assigned to it such as F-Number 4” 4. An Essential Variable listed on the WPS that is not supported by the PQR. Note: Editorial mistakes such as misspellings of company names or typing errors are excluded from the exam. Brief of Variables

We will use the SMAW QW-253 Brief of Variables as a check list as we go through the reviews of two WPS’ and PQR’s.

198

Confusion Welding and Wee Welders

Turn now to QW-253 of Section IX and remove it for convenience during the review.Confusion Welding We will review it step by step for errors. 1. Does our WPS reference our PQR? 2. Has our welding process been listed? 3. Is the Type of welding listed, manual, automatic etc.? * Note: The Type of Welding in box QW-410 at the bottom of QW-253 is out of order in reference to the box on the WPS, as it appears in the title instead of box QW-410 on the WPS.

Conclusions:

1. WPS references our PQR. 2. Our welding process is listed. 3. Type of welding is listed as manual. No mistakes in the title page

Next we compare the variables in the row QW-402 Joints on QW-253 to the box QW-402 Joints on the WPS. 1. Groove design, is it addressed? 2. Backing has it been listed? 3. Has root spacing been detailed? 4. Finally have retainers been mentioned? 402.1 - A Change in Groove Design 402.4 - Deletion/Removal of Backing 402.10 - A Change in Root Spacing 402.11 – Addition or Removal Retainers

199

Conclusions:

Nothing is missing; there are no mistakes in box QW-402 on the WPS. Note that NonEssentials are only wrong if they are missing i.e. the Code user can choose any groove design, root spacing etc.

1. Groove Design is addressed as Single Vee. 2. Backing as Flat Bar P-No.1 steel material. 3. Retainers under Details are Not Allowed. 4. Root Spacing is present under Details. The next listings are in box QW-403 Base Metals. 1. Is the P-Number entered? 2. Is Base Metal Thickness present? 3. Has t pass > 1/2” been addressed? * Note: During the review of the PQR we will confirm that all Essential Variables are in agreement between the WPS and the PQR regarding the specifications and ranges supported.

200

201

Conclusions:

1. The P-Number is present. 2. Base metal thickness range is present. 3. t pass > 1/2” is missing, not addressed! This is a mistake, as all essentials variables must be addressed. *Remember, all variables that apply to the process must be addressed on the WPS, both essential and non-essential.Check the box QW-404 on the WPS for omissions.

1. Is the F-Number present and is it correct? 2. Is the A-Number present if E-XX18 is it A No.1? 3. Diameter of electrodes allowed? 4. The range of weld metal t? 5. AWS Classification how about it? You may remember from our previous lesson that A-Numbers cannot be correctly identified without Section II Part C of the ASME Code. So we can only check for its presence on the form.

Everything on the list is present, but is the Essential Variable F-Number correct? We can’t check the ANumber without Section II Part C. Check the F-Number for E-7018 which appears under the title E-XX18.

202

Conclusions:

1. The F-Number is present but wrong! 2. The A-Number is present. 3. Diameter/Size of electrodes are missing! 4. The range of weld metal t is present. 5. AWS Classification is listed.Now to the back of the WPS to the box QW-405 Positions 1. Are the positions allowed for welding present? 2. Has progression permitted been entered? Since fillets are not on the list of QW-253 you may ignore this entry

203

Conclusion:

1. The positions allowed for welding are present? 2. Progression permitted has been entered? There are no mistakes. However the positions allowed would have been better stated in actual practice by using Flat, Horizontal, Vertical and Overhead (F,H,V,O). 6G is a welder’s all positions qualification test. Now Preheat in box QW-406 1. Has Preheat Temperature been entered? 2. Preheat Maintenance is it there? Interpass Temp. Is a Supplementary Essential you may ignore this entry for the purposes of the test. Conclusion:

1. Preheat Temperature has been entered. 2. Interpass Temp is present but was not required. 3. Preheat Maintenance Temperature is missing! There is one mistake. Preheat Maintenance Temp. is not present, this is an error by omission of a NonEssential Variable.Now Post Weld Heat Treatment in box QW-407. 1. Simple it is addressed as NONE. We will check it against the PQR during the PQR review portion of this instruction.

204

Conclusion:

All we need do is to make sure it is in agreement with what occurred during the making of the supporting PQR test coupon. We will compare those during the PQR portion of this review.Next up is the box QW408 Gases. This is not applicable to the SMAW Process. We will ignore it completely on this review, now for box QW409 Electrical Characteristics. 1. Has the Current been entered? 2. How about the Polarity? 3. What about the Amps (I)? 4. Volts (E)? Conclusion:

1. The Current has been entered. 2. Polarity is there. 3. Amps (I) are present. 4. Volts (E) it is there. No mistakes in block QW-409 Finally block QW-410 Technique 1. String or Weave allowed or both? 2. Initial or interpass cleaning, how? 3. Method of Back Gouging? 4. Multiple to Single pass/side permitted? 5. Peening, is it there? 6. Manual or Automatic welding?

205

Conclusion:

1. String or Weave both is allowed. 2. Initial or interpass cleaning, addressed. 3. Method of Back Gouging present. 4. Multiple to Single pass/side, not addressed! 5. Peening addressed as None Allowed. 6. Manual/Automatic appears in the title. One mistake found, Multiple or Single Pass an error by omission. Now to the front of the PQR and its title section. There isn’t much to see here. The correct company name etc., but the API Body of Knowledge specifies that the WPS will be supported by only one PQR and it will be the correct one. This leaves the welding Process which is addressed as SMAW. All others are non-essential variables and those are not required to be on the PQR, in fact they could be missing.

206

Anything else in the title will fall under Editorial and is not considered on the exam WPS/PQR review questions.

Conclusion:

1. SMAW has been addressed, no mistakes in the PQR title. Note:

The PQR does not have to reference the WPS. A single PQR may support multiple WPS’ since WPS’ are often written years after the PQR’s were made. How could you know the WPS number years before it will be written?

We start all over using QW-253 and the box QW-402 Joints on the PQR, all of those are Non-Essential Variables and are not required on the PQR. Nothing to do here, the box is blank and that is not a mistake.

Note: In a real world PQR, you would never leave the joint design information blank, in fact you would detail it, but Section IX clearly states that Non-Essentials are optional. However the Construction Code will usually force this information be present. For the PQR on this examination it is not required.

207

Using QW-253 in the box QW- 403 Base Metals, we check the following items: 1. Has the P-Number been addressed and does it agree with the WPS? 2. Has the thickness of test coupon been entered and does it support the full range stated on the WPS for production welding.

Conclusion:

1. No P-Numbers listed! 2. The thickness of the test Coupon is stated to be 0.500 but it does not support the full range stated on the WPS of 1/16” to 1”. There are two mistakes, No P-Numbers and the thickness range qualified by the coupon is not adequate for the WPS’ proposed thickness’.

208

Turn now to QW-451.1

We can see that the range supported by the coupon is from 3/16” to 2T. Our T is 0.500 so the range supported is from 3/16” to 1”. Look back to the front of the WPS, it states a range of 1/16” to 1”. The entire range of thickness on the WPS is not supported by the PQR’s test coupon thickness, since it does not support a thickness below 3/16”. What is the P-Number of SA-53 Grade B? What should have been entered in the P-Number boxes? Turn now to

Turn your attention to box QW-404 Filler Metals. 1. Has the F-Number been addressed and correctly? 2. Has the A -Number been entered? 3. AWS Classification, is it present? Note:

Since Supplementary Essentials will not be on the exam, the AWS Class in this case is a Non-Essential Variable. By Section IX, it is not required on the PQR! Strange but true, it could be omitted and only the F-Number listed. Real world it would be there.

209

Box 404 Filler Metals Conclusions:

1. The F-No for E-7018 is correct and is present. 2. The A-No is present. 3. AWS Class is shown as E-7018. 4. Deposited weld metal not addressed.

1 Mistake! Skipping the Non-Essentials of QW-405 Positions and turning to QW-406 Preheat we ask the following: 1. Preheat Temp, is it there and if so does it support the WPS values? 2. Interpass Temp do we need it? Conclusions:

1. Preheat Temp is there but does not support the WPS, the PQR must be within 100°F of the WPS’ listed preheat for production which is only 60 o F. The PQR was qualified with preheat of 175 o F! To fix this you could revise the WPS to a minimum preheat of 75°F (175 – 100 = 75°F). Take a look at the paragraph QW-406.1

1. Interpass Temp is not there, but we do not need it since it is a Supplementary Essential. One Mistake Preheat does not support the WPS.

Now for the Postweld Heat Treatment box. Is it present and, did it agree with the WPS’ Type, Temp and Time? Conclusions:

1. Well since the block is empty, there is only one conclusion. The Essential Variable PWHT has not been addressed. The block being empty does not mean it was not done; it may or may not have been postweld heat treated. How can anyone know? One mistake, PWHT not addressed.All the remaining blocks contain Non-Essential Variables and are blank.

They are not needed on a PQR so we will just pass those blocks and turn to the back of the PQR.

210

Next the Tensile Tests listed in the block QW-150. 1. Is the correct number of tension tests present? 2. Is the math correct? 3. Did the specimens fail at or above the Minimum stated in the rules of QW-153.1 for SA-53 Grade B?

Conclusions:

1. The correct number of tension tests is present, two. 2. The math is correct (using normal rounding). 3. The specimens did meet the Minimum stated by the rules of QW-153.1 for the SA-53 Grade B pipe. Now confirm the above statements.You can see on right that we need two tension tests.

By QW-152 area into load = Tensile Strength

Specimen No. 1 .750” x .453: = .340 sq.” 25010 lbs/.340 sq.” = 73,559 PSI Specimen No. 2 .753” x .456” = .343 sq.” 24,050 lbs/.343 sq.” = 70,116 PSI The Minimum Specified Tensile Strength is 60,000 PSI.

211

The specimens did meet the Minimum stated in the rules of QW-151.3 for SA-53 Grade B. It has a minimum specified tensile strength of 60,000 PSI. According to the requirements of Section IX the specimens could have failed 5% below that and still been acceptable. They failed in the base metal which is also a requirement of QW-153.1

Now the Bend Specimens 1. Is the correct number present? 2. Are they the correct types? 3. Where the results reported and acceptable?

Conclusions:

1. The correct number is 4 and only three are fully present. 2. They are not the correct types, it should be all face and root bends (4 total), or since the coupon is at least 3/8” (.500) 4 side bends are permitted. 3. The results were reported and are not acceptable. There are three mistakes, incorrect number and types of bend specimens, max size of defect exceeds 1/8”.Last, the bottom of the PQR. 1. Has the PQR been signed? Conclusion: No. This is a mistake a PQR is not certified without a signature.

212

213

Wee Welders Now we will do the second WPS/PQR review. We will go through this box by box and find the mistakes and do a recap at the end of this lesson.

214

215

216

QW-483 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORDS (PQR) (See QW-200.2, Section IX, ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code) Record Actual Conditions Used to Weld Test Coupon. Company Name: Wee Welders Procedure Qualification Record No.: WPS No.: R-20 Welding Process (es) SMAW Types (Manual, Automatic, Semi-Auto.)

Date:

R-20

1/30/92

JOINTS (QW-402)

Groove Design of Test Coupon (For combination qualifications, the deposited weld metal thickness shall be recorded for each filler metal or process used.) BASE METALS (QW403) POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (QW-407) Material Spec. Type: SA-369 Type or Grade: Temp: FP 1 1150°F P No.: 3 Gr. No. Gr. No. Time: to P No.: 3 30 mins. Thickness of Test Coupon: Diameter 10“ GAS (QW-408) 0.365“ Other: Shielding FILLER METALS (QW-404) F No 4 A No 2 SFA Spec Number 5.1 AWS Class. No E-7018-A1 Size of Electrode “ Size of Filler Flux Class. Deposit Thk. ” Trade Name Consum. Insert :

Shield Flow (cfh) Purge Gas Purge Flow Trailing Gas Trailing Flow ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (QW-409) Current Max Amps Max Volts Joules Tungsten Size Tungsten Type Pulsing Current TECHNIQUE (QW-410) Bead Type Bead Width Cup Size Back Gouging Layers Electrodes Travel Speed Oscillation

“

”

POSITION (QW-405) Welding Position Welding Progress: PREHEAT (QW-406) Preheat Temp. : Interpass Temp.: Preheat Maintenance:

70º F ºF ºF

217

218

Mistakes on the WPS

Joints (QW-402) 1. Root gap not addressed 2. Retainers not addressed Filler Metals (QW-404) 2. E-7018 - A1 is not A Number 1 it is A Number 2 3. Weld metal thickness not addressed. Technique (QW-410) 4. Multi or single pass not addressed. Mistakes on the PQR

Tensile Tests (QW-150) 6. First tensile specimen was not within the tolerance. The specimen failed at less than 95 % of the specified ultimate tensile strength for the material. Guided Bend Tests (QW-160) 7. The test coupon is 0.365” and it must be 0.375 or greater to use side bends. The coupons should have been subjected to two face and two root bends.

219

Section 16 ASME Section V NDE

Lesson 16 ASME Section V NDE FROM THE API 510 BODY OF KNOWLEDGE III.

NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION

ASME Section V, Nondestructive Examination NOTE: The examination will cover ONLY the main body of each referenced Article, except as noted. Article 1 SCOPE OF SECTION V

The inspector should be familiar with and understand; 1. The Scope of Section V, 2. Rules for use of Section V as a referenced Code, 3. Responsibilities of the Owner / User, and of subcontractors, 4. Calibration, 5. Definitions of "inspection" and examination", 6. Record keeping requirements. ASME Section V T-110 Scope

(a) Unless otherwise specified by the referencing Code Section or other referencing documents, this Section of the Code contains requirements and methods for nondestructive examination which are Code requirements to the extent they are specifically referenced and required by other Code Sections. T-130 Equipment

It is the responsibility of the Manufacturer, fabricator, or installer to ensure that the examination equipment being used conforms to the requirements of this Code Section. T-150 Procedure (b) When an examination to the requirements of this Section of the Code is required by other Sections of the Code, it shall be the responsibility of the Manufacturer, fabricator, or installer to establish nondestructive examination procedures and personnel certification procedures conforming to the referencing Code requirements.

(c) When required by the referencing Code Section, all nondestructive examinations performed under this Code Section shall be done to a written procedure. This procedure shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Inspector. The procedure or method shall comply with the applicable requirements of this Section for the particular examination method….Where so required; written procedures shall be made available to the Inspector on request. At least one copy of each procedure shall be readily available to the Manufacturer’s Nondestructive Examination Personnel for their reference and use.

220

T-170 Examinations and Inspections

a) Throughout this Section of the Code, the word Inspector means the Authorized Inspector who has been qualified as required in the various referencing Code Sections. (b) The special distinction established in the various Code Sections between inspection and examination and the personnel performing them is also adopted in this Code Section. In other words, the term inspection applies to the functions performed by the Authorized Inspector, but the term examination applies to those quality control functions performed by personnel employed by the Manufacturer. T-180 Evaluation The acceptance standards for these methods shall be as stated in the referencing document (s). T-190 Records / Documentation Records/Documentation shall be in accordance with the referencing document (s) and the applicable requirements of Subsection A and/or B of this Code Section.

The code user shall be responsible for all required Records/Documentation. Article 2 Radiographic Examination

The inspector should be familiar with and understand; 1. The Scope of Article 2 and general requirements, 2. The rules for radiography as typically applied on pressure vessels such as, but not limited to: a. required marking b. type, selection, number, and placement of IQI’s, c. allowable density d. control of backscatter radiation e. location markers 3. Records T-210 Scope

The radiographic method described in this Article for examination of materials including castings and welds shall be used together with Article 1, General Requirements. Definitions of terms used in this Article are in Mandatory Appendix V of this Article…… T-223 Backscatter Radiation

A lead symbol “B,” with minimum dimensions of 1/2 " in height and 1/16 in. in thickness, shall be attached to the back of each film holder during each exposure to determine if backscatter radiation is exposing the film. Alert! Can be a Closed Book question! T-224 System of Identification

A system shall be used to produce permanent identification on the radiograph traceable to the contract, component, weld or weld seam, or part numbers, as appropriate. In addition, the Manufacturer’s symbol or name and the date of the radiograph shall be plainly and permanently included on the radiograph. This identification system does not necessarily require that the information appear as radiographic images. In any case, this information shall not obscure the area of interest.

221

T-225 Monitoring Density Limitations of Radiographs

Either a densitometer or step wedge comparison film shall be used for judging film density.

T – 233 Image Quality Indicator (IQI) Design

IQIs shall be either the hole type or the wire type. Hole-type IQIs shall be manufactured and identified in accordance with the requirements or alternates allowed in SE-1025. Wire-type IQIs shall be manufactured and identified in accordance with the requirements or alternates allowed in SE-747, except that the largest wire number or the identity number may be omitted. ASME standard IQIs shall consist of those in Table T-233.1 for hole type and those in Table T-233.2 for wire type.

Table T-233.1 Hole Type IQI Thickness and Hole Diameters •

Questions that come from this table are directed at such things as looking up the thickness of the IQI based on a Designation Number or a specific hole diameter such as 1T, 2T, or 4T for a IQI Designation Number. 222

It is interesting to note that all the Designation Numbers directly relate to the thickness of the Hole Type IQI except for three, numbers 7, 12 and 17. Let’s have a look. * These types of questions should be expected on the first half, Open Book portion of the exam.

Another feature of the Designation Number is in reference to the specific hole such as 1T, 2T, or 4T. The T is the thickness of a given IQI Designation such Number 15 for example. So the 1 x T hole has a diameter of 0.015” and thus the 2 x T hole = 0.030”, 4 x T = 0.060”. However this rule does not hold for the smaller IQI Numbers 5 and 7 which are both identical to Number 10. To say it another way, Numbers 5, 7 and, 10 all have the same diameter of 1T, 2T and 4T holes. Take a look!

223

Table T-233.2 ire IQI Designation, Wire Diameter, and Wire Identity

The alternative and, some think better, Image Quality Indicator (IQI) it the Wire Type.

Information Only No Questions on the Exam

224

Typical question on the Open Book portion of the exam are what is the diameter of a given wire size. For Example: What is the wire size of a Set A # 4 wire? Answer: 0.0063” (0.16 mm). There’s not much tricky here, just read carefully.

225

T-274 Geometric Unsharpness

Geometric Unsharpness shall be determined in accordance with: Ug = Fd /D Where:

Ug = geometric unsharpness F=

Source size: the maximum projected dimension of the radiating source (or effective focal spot) in the plane perpendicular to the distance D from the weld or object being radiographed, inches.

D=

the distance from source of radiation to weld or object being radiographed, inches.

d=

distance from source side of weld or object being radiographed to the film, inches.

D and d shall be determined at the approximate center of the area of interest. * All that is needed here is to remember what the terms mean.

Here is a short definition of Geometric Unsharpness; Source to film distance, object to film distance, and source size directly affect the degree of penumbra shadow and geometric unsharpness of a radiograph. Codes and standards used in industrial radiography require that geometric unsharpness be limited.

226

T-275 Location Markers

Location markers (see Fig. T-275), which are to appear as radiographic images on the film, shall be placed on the part, not on the exposure holder / cassette. Their locations shall be permanently marked on the surface of the part being radiographed when permitted, or on a map, in a manner permitting the area of interest on a radiograph to be accurately traceable to its location on the part, for the required retention period of the radiograph. Evidence shall also be provided on the radiograph that the required coverage of the region being examined has been obtained. Location markers shall be placed as follows. T-275.1 Single-Wall Viewing

(a) Source-Side Markers. Location markers shall be placed on the source side when radiographing the following: (1) flat components or longitudinal joints in cylindrical or conical components; (2) curved or spherical components whose concave side is toward the source and when the “source-to material” distance is less than the inside radius of the component; (3) curved or spherical components whose convex side is toward the source. Using Fig. T-275 we have these three examples;

227

(b) Film-Side Markers (1) Location markers shall be placed on the film side when radiographing either curved or spherical components whose concave side is toward the source and when the “source-tomaterial” distance is greater than the inside radius.

(c) Either Side Markers. Location markers may be placed on either the source side or film side when radiographing either curved or spherical components whose concave side is toward the source and the “source-to-material” distance equals the inside radius of the component.

T – 275.2 Double-Wall Viewing For double-wall viewing, at least one location marker shall be placed adjacent to the weld (or on the material in the area of interest) for each radiograph.

228

T-275.3 Mapping the Placement of Location Markers

When inaccessibility or other limitations prevent the placement of markers as stipulated in T-275.1 and T275.2, a dimensioned map of the actual marker placement shall accompany the radiographs to show that full coverage has been obtained. T-276.1 IQI Material

IQI’s shall be selected from either the same alloy material group or grade as identified in SE-1025 or from an alloy material group or grade with less radiation absorption than the material being radiographed. T-276.2 Size

The designated hole IQI or essential wire shall be as specified in Table T-276. A thinner or thicker holetype IQI may be substituted for any section thickness listed in Table T-276, provided an equivalent IQI sensitivity is maintained. See T-283.2. (a) Welds With Reinforcements. The thickness on which the IQI is based is the nominal single-wall thickness plus the estimated weld reinforcement not to exceed the maximum permitted by the referencing Code Section. Backing rings or strips shall not be considered as part of the thickness in IQI selection. The actual measurement of the weld reinforcement is not required.

(b) Welds Without Reinforcements. The thickness on which the IQI is based is the nominal single-wall thickness. Backing rings or strips shall not be considered as part of the weld thickness in IQI selection.

229

Table T – 276.1 IQI Selection

For the exam you may be required to select the proper IQI for a radiograph. This is by establishing the part thickness as previously discussed, the type of shot, “Source Side” or “Film Side” and apply Table T276.1 Example: For a film side shot of a part thickness that is 0.500: (12.7 mm) what would be the required Hole Type IQI Number?

Answer: # 15 Be careful, don’t answer with the wire number when asked for the hole type designator!

T-277.1 Placement of IQIs

(a) Source-Side IQI(s). The IQI(s) shall be placed on the source side of the part being examined, except for the condition described in T-277.1(b). When, due to part or weld configuration or size, it is not practical to place the IQI(s) on the part or weld, the IQI(s) may be placed on a separate block. Separate blocks shall be made of the same or radiographically similar materials (as defined in SE-1025) and may be used to facilitate IQI positioning. There is no restriction on the separate block thickness, provided the IQI/area of- interest density tolerance requirements of T-282.2 are met. (1) The IQI on the source side of the separate block shall be placed no closer to the film than the source side of the part being radiographed. (2) The separate block shall be placed as close as possible to the part being radiographed. (3) The block dimensions shall exceed the IQI dimensions such that the outline of at least three sides of the IQI image shall be visible on the radiograph.

230

(b) Film-Side IQI(s). Where inaccessibility prevents hand placing the IQI(s) on the source side, the IQI(s) shall be placed on the film side in contact with the part being examined. A lead letter “F” shall be placed adjacent to or on the IQI(s), but shall not mask the essential hole where hole IQIs are used. (c) IQI Placement for Welds - Hole IQI s. The IQI (s) may be placed adjacent to or on the weld. The identification number (s) and, when used, the lead letter “F,” shall not be in the area of interest, except when geometric configuration makes it impractical. (d) IQI Placement for Welds - Wire IQI s. The IQI (s) shall be placed on the weld so that the length of the wires is perpendicular to the length of the weld. (Across the weld) T-281 Quality of Radiographs

All radiographs shall be free from mechanical, chemical, or other blemishes to the extent that they do not mask and are not confused with the image of any discontinuity in the area of interest of the object being radiographed. Such blemishes include, but are not limited to: (a) fogging; (b) processing defects such as streaks, watermarks, or chemical stains; (c) scratches, finger marks, crimps, dirtiness, static marks, smudges, or tears; (d) false indications due to defective screens. T-282.1 Density Limitation

The transmitted film density through the radiographic image of the body of the appropriate hole IQI or adjacent to the designated wire of a wire IQI and the area of interest shall be ** 1.8 minimum for single film viewing for radiographs made with an X-ray source and 2.0 minimum for radiographs made with a gamma ray source. For composite viewing of multiple film exposures, each film of the composite set shall have a minimum density of 1.3. The maximum density shall be 4.0 for either single or composite viewing. A tolerance of 0.05 in density is allowed for variations between densitometer readings. ** This has often been a Closed Book question, due to the belief that an inspector should know the density limits for film as part of his everyday duties. T- 282.2 Density Variation

(a) General. If the density of the radiograph anywhere through the area of interest varies by more than minus 15% or plus 30% from the density through the body of the hole IQI or adjacent to the designated wire of a wire IQI, within the minimum/maximum allowable density ranges specified in T-282.1, then an additional IQI shall be used for each exceptional area or areas and the radiograph retaken. When calculating the allowable variation in density, the calculation may be rounded to the nearest 0.1 within the range specified in T-282.1. (b) With Shims. When shims are used the plus 30% density restriction of (a) above may be exceeded, provided the required IQI sensitivity is displayed and the density limitations of T-282.1 are not exceeded. T- 283 IQI Sensitivity

Radiography shall be performed with a technique of sufficient sensitivity to display the **designated hole IQI image and the 2T hole, or the essential wire of a wire IQI. The radiographs shall also display the IQI identifying numbers and letters. If the designated hole IQI image and 2T hole, or essential wire, do not show on any film in a multiple film technique, but do show in composite film viewing, interpretation shall be permitted only by composite film viewing. ** Here is another Closed Book type question!!

231

T-283.2 Equivalent Hole-Type Sensitivity.

A thinner or thicker hole-type IQI than the required IQI may be substituted, provided an equivalent or better IQI sensitivity, as listed in Table T-283, is achieved and all other requirements for radiography are met. Equivalent IQI sensitivity is shown in any row of Table T-283, which contains the required IQI and hole. Better IQI sensitivity is shown in any row of Table T-283, which is above the equivalent sensitivity row. If the required IQI and hole are not represented in the table, the next thinner IQI row from Table T283 may be used to establish equivalent IQI sensitivity.

T – 284 Excessive Backscatter If a light image of the “B,” as described in T-223, appears on a darker background of the radiograph, protection from backscatter is insufficient and the radiograph shall be considered unacceptable. A dark image of the “B” on a lighter background is not cause for rejection. This seems to be on almost every examination, API 510, 570 and, 653. It can be open or closed book.

232

Section VIII Appendix 4

Rounded Indications Charts Acceptance Standard for Radiographically Determined Rounded Indications in Welds 4-1 Applicability of These Standards These standards are applicable to ferritic, austenitic, and nonferrous materials. 4-2 Terminology

(a) Rounded Indications. * Indications with a maximum length of three times the width or less on the radiograph are defined as rounded indications. These indications may be circular, elliptical, conical, or irregular in shape and may have tails. When evaluating the size of an indication, the tail shall be included. The indication may be from any imperfection in the weld, such as porosity, slag, or tungsten. * Prime test question. (b) Aligned Indications. A sequence of four or more rounded indications shall be considered to be aligned when they touch a line parallel to the length of the weld drawn through the center of the two outer rounded indications. (c) Thickness t. t is the thickness of the weld, excluding any allowable reinforcement. For a butt weld joining two members having different thicknesses at the weld, t is the thinner of these two thicknesses. If a full penetration weld includes a fillet weld, the thickness of the throat of the fillet shall be included in t. * This is the standard definition of t found in other paragraphs of Section VIII.

233

4-3 Acceptance Criteria

(a) Image Density. Density within the image of the indication may vary and is not a criterion for acceptance or rejection. (b) Relevant Indications. (See Table 4-1 for examples.) Only those rounded indications which exceed the following dimensions shall be considered relevant. 1/10 t for t less than 1/8 in. 1/64 in. for t from 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. incl. 1/32 in. for t greater than 1/4 in. to 2 in. incl. 1/16 in. for t greater than 2 in.

(c) Maximum Size of Rounded Indication. (See Table 4-1 for examples.) The maximum permissible size of any indication shall be 1/4t, or 5/32 in., whichever is smaller; except that an isolated indication separated from an adjacent indication by 1 in. or more may be 1/3t, or 1/4 in., whichever is less. For t greater than 2 in. the maximum permissible size of an isolated indication shall be increased to 3/8 in.

(d) Aligned Rounded Indications. Aligned rounded indications are acceptable when the summation of the diameters of the indications is less than t in a length of 12 t. See Fig. 4-1. The length of groups of aligned rounded indications and the spacing between the groups shall meet the requirements of Fig. 4-2. Example 1: The summation of diameters = .900” in a 1.0” thick weld over a 12” length , acceptable. The summation of 1.0” in 12” length is unacceptable. Example 2: The summation of diameters = .245” in a .250” thick weld over a 12 x .250”= 3” length, acceptable. The summation of diameters = 12 x .250” = 3”, unacceptable.

234

(e) Spacing. The distance between adjacent rounded indications is not a factor in determining acceptance or rejection, except as required for isolated indications or groups of aligned indications.

(f) Rounded Indication Charts. The rounded indications characterized as imperfections shall not exceed that shown in the charts. The charts in Figs. 4-3 through 4-8 illustrate various types of assorted, randomly dispersed and clustered rounded indications for different weld thicknesses greater than 1/8 in. (3.2 mm). These charts represent the maximum acceptable concentration limits for rounded indications. The charts for each thickness range represent full-scale 6 in. radiographs, and shall not be enlarged or reduced.

235

(g) Weld Thickness t less than 1/8 in. For t less than 1/8 in. the maximum number of rounded indications shall not exceed 12 in a 6 in. length of weld. A proportionally fewer number of indications shall be permitted in welds less than 6 in. in length. (h) Clustered Indications. The illustrations for clustered indications show up to four times as many indications in a local area, as that shown in the illustrations for random indications. The length of an acceptable cluster shall not exceed the lesser of 1 in. or 2t. Where more than one cluster is present, the sum of the lengths of the clusters shall not exceed 1 in. in a 6 in. length weld.

236

SE-797 Standard Practice for Measuring Thickness By Manual Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Contact Method E. Article 23, Ultrasonic Standards, Section SE–797 only – Standard practice for measuring thickness by manual ultrasonic pulse-echo contact method:

The inspector should be familiar with and understand; 1) The Scope of Article 23, Section SE-797, 2) The general rules for applying and using the Ultrasonic method 3) The specific procedures for Ultrasonic thickness measurement as contained in paragraph 7. Scope

This practice provides guidelines for measuring the thickness of materials using the contact pulse-echo method at temperatures not to exceed ** 200°F (93°C). ** Best know this fact The velocity in the material being examined is a function of the physical properties of the material. It is usually assumed to be a constant for a given class of materials. Thickness (T), when measured by the pulse-echo ultrasonic method, is a product of the velocity of sound in the material and one half the transit time (round trip) through the material. T = Vt/2

Where: T = Thickness V = Velocity t = time One or more reference blocks are required having known velocity, or of the same material to be examined, and having thicknesses accurately measured and in the range of thicknesses to be measured. It is generally desirable that the thicknesses be “round numbers” rather than miscellaneous odd values. One block should have a thickness value near the maximum of the range of interest and another block near the minimum thickness. Following are four cases of Direct Contact thickness measurement calibration. Questions on the exam come from here primarily. These are the calibration and as such it is expected that an API Inspector has a working knowledge of calibration. Meaning these can be Closed Book exam questions. 7.1 Case I — Direct Contact, Single-Element Search Unit: 7.1.1 Conditions — The * display start is synchronized to the initial pulse. All display elements are linear. Full thickness is displayed on CRT.

* Buzz words that mean Direct Contact Single-Element or Case 1. 7.1.4 The readings should then be checked and adjusted on standardization blocks with thickness of lesser value to improve the overall accuracy of the system.

237

7.2 Case II — Delay Line Single-Element Search Unit: 7.2.1 Conditions — When using this search unit, it is necessary that the * equipment be capable of correcting for the time during which the sound passes through the delay line so that the end of the delay can be made to coincide with zero thickness. This requires a so-called “delay” control in the instrument or automatic electronic sensing of zero thickness.

* Be able to recognize this statement is associated with Case II. 7.2.2.1

Use at ** least two standardization blocks. One should have a thickness near the maximum of the range to be measured and the other block near the minimum thickness. For convenience, it is desirable that the thickness should be **“round numbers” so that the difference between them also has a convenient round number” value.

** Repeated many times in SE-797, two blocks, round numbers. 7.2.2.2

Place the search unit **sequentially on one and then the other block, and obtain both readings. The difference between these two readings should be calculated. If the reading thickness difference is less than the actual thickness difference, place the search unit on the thicker specimen, and adjust the material standardize control to expand the thickness range. If reading thickness difference is greater than the actual thickness difference, place the search unit on thicker specimen, and adjust the material standardize control to decrease…

** Know this sequence of calibration. 7.3 Case III — Dual Search Units: 7.3.1 The method described in 7.2 (Case II) is also suitable for equipment using dual search units in the thicker ranges, above 3 mm (0.125 in.). However, below those values there is an inherent error due to the Vee path that the sound beam travels. The transit time is no longer linearly proportional to thickness, and the condition deteriorates toward the low thickness end of the range.

** A feature that identifies Case III. 7.4 Case IV — Thick Sections: 7.4.1 Conditions — For use when a high degree of accuracy is required for thick sections. 7.4.2 Direct contact search unit and initial pulse synchronization are used. The display start is delayed as described in 7.4.4. All display elements should be linear. Incremental thickness is displayed on the CRT. 7.4.3 Basic standardization of the sweep will be made as described in Case I. The standardization block chosen for this standardization should have a thickness that will permit standardizing the full-sweep distance to adequate accuracy, that is, about 10 mm (0.4 in.) or 25 mm (1.0 in.) full scale. 7.4.4 After basic standardization, the sweep must be delayed. For instance, if the nominal part thickness is expected to be from 50 to 60 mm (2.0 to 2.4 in.), and the basic standardization block is 10 mm (0.4 in.), and the incremental thickness displayed will also be from 50 to 60 mm (2.0 to 2.4 in.), the following steps are required. Adjust the delay control so that the fifth back echo of the basic standardization block, equivalent to 50 mm (2.0 in.), is aligned with the 0 reference on the CRT. The sixth back echo should then occur at the right edge of the standardized sweep.

238

239

Section VIII Appendix 12 Ultrasonic Examination of Welds (UT) 12-1 Scope

(a) This Appendix describes methods which shall be employed when ultrasonic examination of welds is specified in this Division. (b) Article 4 of Section V shall be applied for detail requirements in methods....... 12 – 2 Certification of Competence of Nondestructive Examiner

The Manufacturer shall certify that personnel performing and evaluating ultrasonic examinations required by this Division have been qualified and certified in accordance with their employer’s written practice. SNT-TC-1A shall be used as a guideline for employers….. . Alternatively, the ASNT Central Certification Program (ACCP)1 or CP-189 may be used to fulfill the examination and demonstration requirements of SNT-TC-1A and the employer’s written practice…….. These requirements are repeated throughout the all of the Appendices i.e. Appendix 4, 6, and 8. 12 – 3 Acceptance – Rejection Standards

These Standards shall apply unless other standards are specified for specific applications within this Division. Imperfections which produce a response greater than 20% of the reference level shall be investigated to the extent that the operator can determine the shape, identity, and location of all such imperfections and evaluate them in terms of the acceptance standards given in (a) and (b) below. (a) Indications characterized as cracks, lack of fusion, or incomplete penetration are unacceptable regardless of length. Once again referenced in all Appendices! (b) Other imperfections are unacceptable if the indications exceed the reference level amplitude and have lengths which exceed: (1) 1/4 in. for t up to 3/4 in. ; (2) 1/3t for t from 3/4 in. to 2-1/4 in.; (3) 3/4 in. for t over 2-1/4 in. . where t is the thickness of the weld excluding any allowable reinforcement. For a butt weld joining two members having different thicknesses at the weld, t is the thinner of these two thicknesses… 12 – 4 Report of Examination

The Manufacturer shall prepare a report of the ultrasonic examination and a copy of this report shall be retained by the Manufacturer until the Manufacturer’s Data Report has been signed by the Inspector. The report shall contain the information required by Section V. In addition, a record of repaired areas shall be noted as well as the results of the reexamination of the repaired areas. The Manufacturer shall also maintain a record of all reflections from uncorrected areas having responses that exceed 50% of the reference level…

240

Liquid Penetrant Testing Section V Article 6, Liquid Penetrant Examination, including Mandatory Appendices II and III:

The inspector should be familiar with and understand: 1. The Scope of Article 6, 2. The general rules for applying and using the liquid penetrant method such as, but not limited to; a) procedures b) contaminants c) techniques d) examination e) interpretation f) documentation and g) record keeping T- 600 Scope

The liquid penetrant examination method is an effective means for * detecting discontinuities which are open to the surface of nonporous metals and other materials. Typical discontinuities detectable by this method are cracks, seams, laps, and porosity. In principle, a liquid penetrant is applied to the surface to be examined and allowed to enter…… * Closed book question for certain. T- 620 General

Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with a written procedure. Each procedure shall include at least…………. : (a) the materials, shapes, or sizes to be examined, and the extent of the examination; (b) type (number or letter designation if available) of each penetrant, penetrant remover, emulsifier, and developer; (c) processing details for pre-examination cleaning and drying, including the cleaning materials used and minimum time allowed for drying; T- 642 Surface Preparation

(a) In general, satisfactory results may be obtained when the surface of the part is in the as-welded, as rolled, as-cast, or as-forged condition. Surface preparation by grinding, machining, or other methods may be necessary where surface irregularities could mask indications of unacceptable discontinuities. (b) Prior to each liquid penetrant examination, the surface to be examined and all adjacent areas within * at least 1 in. shall be dry and free of all dirt, grease, lint, scale, welding flux, weld spatter, paint, oil, and other………… * 1 inch is common to all cleaning operations for NDE.

241

T- 650 Procedure / Technique T- 651 Techniques

Either a color contrast (visible) penetrant or a fluorescent penetrant shall be used with one of the following three penetrant processes: (a) water washable (b) post-emulsifying (c) solvent removable

The visible and fluorescent penetrant used in combination with these three penetrant processes result in six liquid penetrant techniques. 6 Techniques from Two Processes 1. Visible water washable 2. Visible post-emulsifying 3. Visible solvent removable 4. Fluorescent water washable 5. Fluorescent post-emulsifying 6. Fluorescent solvent removable T- 652 Techniques for Standard Temperatures

As a standard technique, the temperature of the penetrant and the surface of the part to be processed shall not be below * 50°F nor above 125°F throughout the examination period. Local heating or cooling is permitted provided the part temperature remains in the range of 50°F to 125°F during the examination. * These temperatures can be on the Closed Book portion. Where it is not practical to comply with these temperature limitations, other temperatures and times may be used, provided the procedures are qualified as specified in T-653. T- 653 Techniques for Nonstandard Temperatures

When it is not practical to conduct a liquid penetrant examination within the temperature range of 50°F to 125°F, the examination procedure at the proposed lower or higher temperature range requires qualification. This shall require the use of a quench cracked aluminum block, which in this Article is designated as a liquid penetrant comparator block.

242

Comparator Block Appendix III

T- 654 Technique Restrictions

* Fluorescent penetrant examination shall not follow a color contrast penetrant examination. Intermixing of penetrant materials from different families or different manufacturers is not permitted. * This something that all inspectors are expected to know, Closed Book… A retest with water washable penetrant may cause loss of marginal indications due to contamination. T- 671 Penetrant Application

The penetrant may be applied by any suitable means, such as dipping, brushing, or spraying. If the penetrant is applied by spraying using compressed-air-type apparatus, filters shall be placed on the upstream side near the air inlet to preclude contamination of the penetrant by oil… T- 672 Penetration Time Penetration time is critical. The minimum penetration time shall be as required in Table T-672 or as qualified by demonstration for specific applications.

243

T- 673 Excess Penetrant Removal

After the specified penetration time has elapsed, any penetrant remaining on the surface shall be removed, taking care to minimize removal of penetrant from discontinuities. T- 673.1 Water Washable Penetrant

Excess water washable penetrant shall be removed with a water spray. The water pressure shall not exceed 50 psi, and the water temperature shall not exceed 110°F. T- 673.3 Solvent Removable Penetrant

**** Excess solvent removable penetrant shall be removed by wiping with a cloth or absorbent paper, repeating the operation until most traces of penetrant have been removed. The remaining traces shall be removed by lightly wiping the surface with cloth or absorbent paper moistened with solvent. To minimize removal of penetrant from discontinuities, care shall be taken to avoid the use of excess solvent. Flushing the surface with solvent, following the application of the penetrant and prior to developing, is prohibited. **** Definitely Closed Book T- 674 Drying After Excess Penetrant Removal

(a) For the water washable or post-emulsifying technique, the surfaces may be dried by blotting with clean materials or by using circulating air, provided the temperature of the surface is not raised above 125°F (52°C). (b) For the solvent removable technique, the surfaces may be dried by normal evaporation, blotting, wiping, or forced air. T- 675 Developing

The developer shall be applied as soon as possible after penetrant removal; the time interval shall not exceed that established in the procedure. Insufficient coating thickness may not draw the penetrant out of discontinuities; conversely, excessive coating thickness may mask indications. With color contrast penetrants, only a wet developer shall be used. With fluorescent penetrant, a wet or dry developer may be used. Developing time for final interpretation begins immediately after the application of a dry developer or as soon as a wet developer coating is dry. The minimum developing time shall be as required by Table T-672. T- 676.1 Final Interpretation

Final interpretation shall be made within 10 to 60 min after the requirements of T-675.3 are satisfied. If bleed-out does not alter the examination results, longer periods are permitted. If the surface to be examined is large enough to preclude complete examination within the prescribed or established time, the examination shall be performed in increments. T- 676.2 Characterizing Indications

The type of discontinuities is difficult to evaluate if the penetrant diffuses excessively into the developer. If this condition occurs, close observation of the formation of indication (s) during application of the developer may assist in characterizing and determining the extent of the indication.

244

Appendix 8 Section VIII Methods for Liquid Penetrant Examination (PT) 8-1

(a) This Appendix describes methods which shall be employed whenever liquid penetrant examination is specified in this Division……… 8-2 Certification of Competency of Nondestructive Examination Personnel

The manufacturer shall certify that each liquid penetrant examiner meets the following requirements. (a) He has vision, with correction if necessary, to enable him to read a Jaeger Type No. 2 Standard Chart at a distance of not less than 12 in. , and is capable of distinguishing and differentiating contrast between colors used. These requirements shall be checked annually. (b) He is competent in the techniques of the liquid penetrant examination certified…

method for which he is

8-3 Evaluation of Indications

An indication of an imperfection may be larger than the imperfection that causes it; however, the size of the indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation. Only indications with major dimensions greater than 1/16 in. shall be considered relevant. (a) A linear indication is one having a length greater than three times the width. (b) A rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with the length equal to or less than three times the width. (c) Any questionable or doubtful indications shall be reexamined to determine whether or not they are relevant. 8-4 Acceptance Standards

These acceptance standards shall apply unless other more restrictive standards are specified for specific materials or applications within this Division. All surfaces to be examined shall be free of: (a) relevant linear indications; (b) relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 in.; (c) four or more relevant rounded indications in a line separated by 1/16 in. or less (edge to edge).

245

8-5 Repair Requirements

** Unacceptable imperfections shall be repaired and reexamination made to assure removal or reduction to an acceptable size. Whenever an imperfection is repaired by chipping or grinding and subsequent repair by welding is not required, the excavated area shall be blended into the surrounding surface so as to avoid sharp notches, crevices, or corners. Where welding is required. ** All of the Appendices mention this operation for repairs. (a) Treatment of Indications Believed Nonrelevant. Any indication which is believed to be nonrelevant shall be regarded as an imperfection unless it is shown by reexamination by the same method or by the use of other nondestructive methods and/or by surface conditioning that no unacceptable imperfection is present. (b) Examination of Areas From Which Defects Have Been Removed. After a defect is thought to have been removed and prior to making weld repairs, the area shall be examined by suitable methods to ensure it has been removed or reduced to an acceptably sized imperfection. (c) Reexamination of Repair Areas. After repairs have been made, the repaired area shall be blended into the surrounding surface so as to avoid sharp notches, crevices, or corners and reexamined by the liquid penetrant method and by all other methods of examination that were originally required for the affected area, except that, when the depth of repair is less than the radiographic sensitivity required, re-radiography may be omitted.

246

Magnetic Particle Testing Section V Article 7, Magnetic Particle Examination (Yoke and Prod techniques only)

The inspector should be familiar with and understand the general rules for applying and using the magnetic particle method such as, but not limited to; 1. The Scope of Article 7, 2. General requirements such as but not limited to requirements for: a. procedures b. techniques (Yoke and Prod only) c. calibration d. examination e. Interpretation 3. Documentation and record keeping T- 720 General

The magnetic particle examination method may be applied to detect cracks and other discontinuities on or near the surfaces of ferromagnetic materials. The sensitivity is greatest for surface discontinuities and diminishes rapidly with increasing depth of subsurface discontinuities below the surface. Typical types of discontinuities that can be detected by this method are cracks, laps, seams,… maximum sensitivity will be to linear discontinuities oriented perpendicular to the lines of flux. For optimum effectiveness in detecting all types of discontinuities, each area should be examined at least twice, with the lines of flux during one examination approximately perpendicular to the lines of flux during the other. T-721 Written Procedures T- 721.1 Requirements

Magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with a written procedure, which shall as a minimum contain the requirements listed in Table T-721. The written procedure shall establish a single value, or a range of values, for each requirement.

247

T- 721.2 Procedure Qualifications

When Procedure qualification is specified, a change of a requirement in Table T-721 identified as an essential variable from the specified value, or range of values shall require requalification of the written procedure. T- 741 Surface Conditioning T- 741.1 Preparation (b) Prior to magnetic particle examination, the surface to be examined and all adjacent areas within at least *1 in………..

* Once again we see that 1in is the standard distance for cleaning prior all the surface examinations. T- 750 TECHNIQUE T- 751 Techniques

One or more of the following five magnetization techniques shall be used: (a) prod technique: (b) longitudinal ….. Not on Exam (c) circular …….Not on Exam (d) yoke technique: (e) multidirectional….. Not on ExamT – 752 Prod TechniqueT-752.1 Magnetizing Procedure. For the prod technique, magnetization is accomplished by portable… T-752.2 ** Direct or rectified magnetizing current shall be used. The current shall be 100 (minimum) amp/in. to 125 (maximum) amp/in. of prod spacing for sections 3/4 in. thick or greater. For sections less than 3/4 in. thick, the current shall be 90 amp/in. to 110 amp/in. of prod spacing.

** This is not something the every day inspector would know as part of his work. It should be Open Book. T-752.3 ** Prod spacing shall not exceed 8 in . Shorter spacing may be used to accommodate the geometric limitations of the area being examined or to increase the sensitivity, but prod spacing of less than 3 in are usually not practical due to banding of the particles around the prods.

** Reported to be on Closed Book T- 755 Yoke Technique T-755.1 Application ** This method shall only be applied to detect discontinuities that are open to the surface of the part. T-755.2 Magnetizing Procedure.

For this technique alternating or direct current electromagnetic yokes, or permanent magnet yokes shall be used. Note: For materials 1/4” or less in thickness, alternating current yokes are superior to direct or permanent magnet yokes of equal lifting power for the detection of SURFACE discontinuities. ** Closed book for sure.

248

T- 760 Calibration of Equipment

(a) Frequency. Each piece of magnetizing equipment with an ammeter shall be calibrated at least once a year, or whenever the equipment has been subjected to major electric repair, periodic overhaul, or damage. If equipment has not been in use for a year or more, calibration shall be done prior to first use.(b) Procedure. The accuracy of the unit’s meter shall be verified annually by equipment traceable to a national standard. Comparative readings shall be taken for at least three different current output levels encompassing the usable range.(c) Tolerance. The unit’s meter reading shall not deviate by more than ±10% of full scale, relative to the actual current value as shown by the test meter. T- 762 Lifting Power of Yokes

(a) Prior to use, the magnetizing power of electromagnetic yokes shall have been checked within the past year. The magnetizing power of permanent magnetic yokes shall be checked daily prior to use. The magnetizing power of all yokes shall be checked whenever the yoke has been damaged or repaired. ** (b) Each alternating current electromagnetic yoke shall have a lifting power of at least 10 lb at the maximum pole spacing that will be used. **(c) Each direct current or permanent magnetic yoke shall have a lifting power of at least 40 lb (18.1 kg) at the maximum pole spacing that will be used. ** On almost every exam both open and closed book.

249

T- 764 Magnetic Field Adequacy and Direction T-764.1 Magnetic Field Adequacy

The applied magnetic field shall have sufficient strength to produce satisfactory indications, but shall not be so strong… T-764.1.1 Pie-Shaped Magnetic Particle Field Indicator

The indicator, shown in Fig T-764.1.1 shall be positioned on the surface to be examined, such that the copper-plated side is away from the inspected surface. A suitable field strength is indicated when a clearly defined line… T-764.1.2 Artificial Flaw Shims

The shim, shown in Fig T-764.1.2 shall be attached to the surface to be examined, such that the… Hall Effect not on Examination.

T- 773 Method of Examination

The ferromagnetic particles used in an examination medium can be either wet or dry, an may be either fluorescent or nonfluorescent. Examination(s) shall be by the * continuous method. (a) Dry Particles. ** The magnetizing current shall remain on while the examination medium is being applied and while any excess of the examination medium is being removed. (b) Wet Particles. The magnetizing current shall be turned on ** after the particles have been applied. Flow particles shall stop with the application of current. ** Known to be test questions on both halves. T- 774 Examination Coverage

All examinations shall be conducted with sufficient field overlap to ensure 100% coverage at the required sensitivity (T-753). T – 777.1 Visible (Color Contrast) Magnetic Particles... A minimum light intensity of 100 fc (1000 Lx) is required to ensure adequate sensitivity during the examination and evaluation of indications.

250

T – 777.2 Fluorescent Particles

With fluorescent particles, the process is essentially the same as in T-777.1 . The examination shall be performed as follows: (a) It shall be performed in a darkened area. (b) The examiner shall be in the darkened area for **at least 5 min prior to performing the examination to enable his eyes to adapt to dark viewing. If the examiner wears glasses or lenses, they shall not be photosensitive. (c) The black light shall be allowed to warm up for a minimum of ** 5 min prior to use or measurement of the intensity of the ultraviolet light emitted. ** Remember 5 minutes.(d) The black light intensity shall be measured with a black light meter. A minimum of 1000 W/cm2 on the surface of the part being examined shall be required. The black light intensity shall be ** verified at least once every 8 hr, whenever the work station is changed, or whenever the bulb is changed. ** Here is another known test question T- 780 Evaluation

(a) All indications shall be evaluated in terms of the acceptance standards of the referencing Code Section. (b) Discontinuities on or near the surface are indicated by retention of the examination medium. However, localized surface irregularities due to machining marks or other surface conditions may produce false indications. (c) Broad areas of particle accumulation, which might mask indications from discontinuities, are prohibited, and such areas shall be cleaned and reexamined.

251

Appendix 6 Section VIII Magnetic Particle Examination (MT) 6-1 Scope(a) This Appendix provides for procedures which shall be followed whenever magnetic particle examination is specified in this Division.

(b) Article 7 of Section V shall be applied for the detail requirements in methods and procedures,… (c) Magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with a written procedure,… 6 – 2 Certification of Competency for Nondestructive Examination PersonnelThe manufacturer shall

certify that each magnetic particle examiner meets the following requirements.(a) He has vision, with correction if necessary, to enable him to read a Jaeger Type No. 2 Standard Chart at a distance of not less than 12 in., and is capable of distinguishing and differentiating contrast between colors used. These requirements shall be checked annually. Repeat of the other appendices. (b) He is competent in the techniques of the magnetic particle examination method, for which he is certified, 6-3 Evaluation of Indications

Indications will be revealed by retention of magnetic particles. All such indications are not necessarily imperfections, however, since excessive surface roughness, magnetic permeability variations (such as at the edge of heat affected zones), etc., may produce similar indications. An indication of an imperfection may be larger than the imperfection that causes it; however, the size of the indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation. Only indications which have any dimension greater than ** 1/16 in. shall be considered relevant. ** Same as for Dye Penetrant!(a) A linear indication is one having a length greater than three times the width. Repeat……of the description of a linear indication from other NDE methods such as Dye penetrant. (b) A rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with a length equal to or less than three times its width. Repeat of the description of a rounded indication.(c) Any questionable or doubtful indications shall be reexamined to determine whether or not they are relevant. 6 – 4 Acceptance StandardsThese acceptance standards shall apply unless other more restrictive standards are specified for specific materials or applications within this Division.

All surfaces to be examined shall be free of: (a) relevant linear indications;(b) Relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 in. ;(c) four or more relevant rounded indications in a line separated by 1/16 in. or less, edge to edge.

252

Section 17 RP-577 Welding Inspection and Metallurgy

Lesson 17 RP-577 Welding Inspection and Metallurgy Introduction

Much of the content of RP-577 has been gathered from other technical and Code publications. Overall it is a fine publication and represents a lot of hard work. Since many of these subjects are covered in previous lessons, such as several of the NDE processes and Welding procedures this lesson will not address those same issues again, unless there is added information not presented previously. RP-577 should be taken quite seriously during study. It is a new document on the examination, and as such you should expect approximately 10 questions from it. You may even prefer to use this document as your primary source for the study of welding and NDE as it is specifically pointed at in-service inspection methods. However the ASME Code Sections V, VIII Div.1 and, IX must not be neglected as they are still a part of the examination. The parts of RP-577 covered in the lesson will not be addressed completely. The effort will be to introduce the topics of RP-577 and familiarize the student with its content and study responsibilities. However a question and answer study exercise has been provided for exam preparation. Lesson Objectives •

Become familiar with definitions and welding inspection terminology

•

Understand the tasks and processes required to perform welding inspections. - Tasks Prior to Welding. - Tasks during Welding Operations - Tasks upon Completion of Welding - Non-conformances and Defects - NDE Examiner Certification - Safety Precautions

•

Introduce the welding process types and their advantages and disadvantages based on intended application, these include: - Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) - Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) - Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) - Flux Core Arc Welding (FCAW) - Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) - Stud Arc Welding (SW)

254

Lesson Objectives

Introduce Non-Destructive Examinations methods not covered in previous class lessons and their applications, to include;

•

- Types of Discontinuities - Materials Identification methods - Visual Examination (VT) - Alternating Current Field Measurement (ACFM) - Eddy Current Inspection (ET) - Hardness Testing - Pressure and Leak Testing (LT) - Weld Inspection Data Recording •

Outline basic application of metallurgy to the welding processes, including; - The Structure of Metals and Alloys - Physical Properties - Mechanical Properties - Preheating - Post-weld Heat Treatment - Hardening - Material Test Reports - Weldability of Steels - Weldability of High-alloys

•

Present the nature of and remedies for Refinery and Petrochemical Plant Welding Issues, such as; - General Issues in welding - Hot Tapping and In-service Welding - Lack of Fusion with GMAW-S Welding Process

Other Items to be discussed • • • •

Welding Terminology and Welding Symbols Actions to Address Improperly made production welds. Guide to common filler metals selection Example RT reports

255

We will begin with Section 3 - Definitions Once again we will not attempt to cover any of these items in their entirety during class. This is to be considered an introduction to RP-577 and to the subject material on the exam Body of Knowledge. Definitions

Many of the definitions listed are common and probably many of these you already know. However what you and I think of as being one thing, they may use a different term for. Example: Penetrameter is an outdated term it is now called an Image Quality Indicator (IQI). We will go through a few of the less known definitions, but subjects from RP-577 are largely a read and remember task for the exam. ‘Some of the less known’ autogenous weld: A fusion weld made without filler metal. (The most common of these types of welds is made on tubing and performed with Gas Tungsten Arc Welding often using an automated welding device) actual throat: The shortest distance between the weld root and the face of a fillet weld.

Be sure to spend some time learning to recognize definitions!

256

Section 4 Welding Inspection

The focus of Section 4 is to detail the tasks that are considered the responsibility of the Inspection group as well other concerned parties who will design, examine, or perform welding. The other issues that the inspector must address as part of tasks prior to welding are; NDE Information Welding Equipment and Instruments Heat Treatment and Pressure Testing Materials Weld Preparation Preheat Welding Consumables

The items above are very similar in there language as to the individual of the various group’s responsibilities, concentrate on the INSPECTOR’S tasks during your studies. While Section 4 of RP-577 is rather lengthy, it follows a definite outlined pattern. The emphasis should be on items that you do not have actual work experience with. For example if you have not followed a PWHT procedure spend your time studying these items as opposed to something you have experience with. Do not overlook items such as Safety Precautions or Documentation during your studies.

257

Welding Processes •

These 6 welding process types and their advantages and disadvantages based on intended application should be thoroughly understood prior to examination day. The following is a brief overview of; - Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) - Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) - Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) - Flux Core Arc Welding (FCAW) - Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) - Stud Arc Welding (SW) 5.2 Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)

SMAW is the most widely used of the various arc welding processes. SMAW uses an arc between a covered electrode and the weld pool. It employs the heat of the arc, coming from the tip of a consumable covered electrode, to melt the base metal. Shielding is provided from the decomposition of the electrode covering, without the application of pressure and with filler metal from the electrode. • •

Either alternating current (ac) or direct current (dc) may be employed, depending on the welding power supply and the electrode selected. A constant-current (CC) power supply is preferred. SMAW is a manual welding process. See Figures 1 and 2 for schematics of the SMAW circuit and welding process.

258

•

Advantages - Simple, inexpensive and portable - Useable in tight places - Less sensitive to wind and drafts than other processes - Useable with most common metals and alloys

•

Limitations - Slow welding compared to GMAW or SAW - Cleaning problems due to slag left from electrode covering

Study each of the six welding processes in order to recognize these by written descriptions. Get to know the advantages and disadvantages of all six.

259

Appendix A Terminology and Symbols

We will defer the NDE and Metallurgy coverage for now and stay with the welding topics from RP571. Appendix A consists of 5 pages of graphics. The topics are; A.1 Weld Joint Types A.2 Weld Symbols A.3 Weld Joint Nomenclature A.4 Electrode Identification

A.1 Weld Joint Types • You may be required to identify any of these joints based on a description or a sketch.

260

A.2 Weld Symbols

A-3 Supplementary Symbols

A.4 Weld Joint Nomenclature

261

A.5 Weld Joint Nomenclature

A.6 Electrode Identification SMAW

You can be required answer Closed Book questions on the AWS Classification shown in these figures. A.7 Electrode Identification GMAW/GTAW

262

A.8 Electrode Identification FCAW

A.9 Electrode Identification SAW

263

Appendix B Actions to Address Improperly Made Production Welds

The following flow charts are the recommended method of addressing problems during welding. Here again we have case of just having to try and remember where this information is and possibly answer a Open Book question as regards the proper corrective action based on the listed circumstances. Production welds made by an unqualified welder or an improper welding procedure should be addressed to assure the final weldments meet the service requirements. A welder may be unqualified for several reasons including expired qualification, not qualified for the thickness, not qualified in the technique, or not qualified for the material of construction. Figure B-1 details some potential steps to address the disposition of these welds. A welding procedure may be improper if the weldment is made outside the range of essential variables (and supplementary essential variables, if required) qualified for the WPS. Figure B-2 details some potential steps to address weldments made with an improper welding procedure. Figure B -1 Suggested Actions for Welds Made by an Incorrect Welder Identify and quarantine all improper weldments made by welder

Pass

Fail Test Welder to qualify Identify reason for failure and retrain welder

Pass

Pass Perform additional NDE of production welds

Retest Welder

Fail Fail Accept and Document welds

Repair welds that failed NDE requirements Cut Out Weld(s)

Potential Causes a. Expired qualification. b. Not qualified in range. c. Not qualified in method. d. Not qualified in material

264

Figure B-2 Steps to Address Production Welds Made to an Improper WPS

Identify and quarantine all weldments made to the improper WPS

Welment has significant impact on component integrity

Welment has minor impact on component integrity Review criticality of the differences

Cut Out and reweld with correct WPS Suitable for application

Specify changes to obtain proper WPS

Review PQR for suitability or rerun PQR

Pass Fail Repair weld

Apply NDE QA/QC

Unsuitable for application Cut Out and reweld with correct WPS

Accept and Document welds

265

Appendix D Expect “Look up Questions” from these tables.

266

267

Section 9 Non-Destructive Examination

In this section we will primarily cover the NDE process not covered in ASME Section V. For classroom instruction we will only go over the highlights, strengths and weakness of the given processes. Once again this is a subject that will demand a lot of personal study for the candidate to do well on the exam. Expect to put many hours into this and the previous welding material. Be warned, as regards the examination the amount of detail about the actual practice of NDE in Section 9 is huge, when taken as a whole. It is really only an overview of the common NDE processes. There are about 13 pages of text, a dozen or so Tables, and approximately 40 Figures. This is going to take a lot of study. Section 9 Non-Destructive Examination Discontinuities

The following statements from this section should give a good clue as to how the API committee will handle questions from this area. “The inspector should choose an NDE method capable of detecting the discontinuity in the type of weld joint due to the configuration. Table 2 and Figure 11 list the common types and location of discontinuities and illustrate their positions within a butt weld. The most commonly used NDE methods used during weld inspection are shown in Table 3.” “Table 4 lists the various weld joint types and common NDE methods available to inspect their configuration. Table 5 further lists the detection capabilities of the most common NDE methods. Additional methods, like alternating current field measurement (ACFM), have applications in weld inspection and are described in this section but are less commonly used.” “The inspector should be aware of discontinuities common to specific base metals and weld processes to assure these discontinuities are detectable. Table 6 is a summary of these discontinuities, potential NDE methods and possible solutions to the weld process

268

Table - 2 Common Types of Discontinuities

Table - 2 Common Types of Discontinuities

Numbers in Circles refer to Table 2

269

Table 3 Commonly Used NDE Methods

Table 4 - Capability of the Applicable Method for Weld Types

Table 5 - Capability of the Applicable Method Vs. Discontinuity

270

Table 6 - Discontinuities Commonly Encountered in Welding Processes

271

9.2 MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION

During welding inspection, the inspector may need to verify the conformance of the base material and filler metal chemistries with the selected or specified alloyed materials. This may include reviewing the certified mill test report, reviewing stamps or markings on the components, or require PMI testing. It is the responsibility of the owner/user to establish a written material verification program indicating the extent and type of PMI to be conducted. Guidelines for material control and verification are outlined in API RP 578. 9.3 VISUAL EXAMINATION (VT) 9.3.1 General

Visual examination is the most extensively used NDE method for welds. It includes either the direct or indirect observation of the exposed surfaces of the weld and base metal. Direct visual examination is conducted when access is sufficient to place the eye within 6 in. – 24 in. (150 mm – 600 mm) of the surface to be examined and at an angle not less than 30 degrees to the surface as illustrated in Figure 12. Mirrors may be used to improve the angle of vision. Remote visual examination may be substituted for direct examination. 9.3.1 General

Remote examination may use aids such as telescopes, borescopes, fiberscope, cameras or other suitable instruments, provided they have a resolution at least equivalent to that which is attained by direct visual examination. In either case, the illumination should be sufficient to allow resolution of fine detail. These illumination requirements are to be addressed in a written procedure.

Figure 12 – Direct Visual Examination Requirements

272

•

Complete your studies by becoming familiar with all of the remaining topics in this section. 9.3.2.1 Optical Aids 9.3.2.2 Mechanical Aids 9.3.2.3 Weld Examination Devices

•

Concentrate on the various figures and the name of each inspection device, how it is used, and what it is used for. Also be aware that pictures can be part of the exam.

Example Weld Examination Device: The inspection tool in the picture below is ______________. 1. 2. 3. 4.

a Bridge Cam Gauge a T-Fillet Weld Gauge a Weld Fillet Gauge an Adjustable Fillet Weld Gauge

273

9.5 Alternating Current Field Measurement (ACFM) Principle of Operation •

The ACFM technique is an electromagnetic non-contacting technique that is able to detect and size surface breaking defects in a range of different materials and through coatings of varying thickness.

•

This technique is ideal for inspecting complex geometries such as nozzles, ring-grooves, grind-out areas or radiuses. It requires minimal surface preparation and can be used at elevated temperatures up to 900°F (482°C).

•

With its increased sensitivity to shallow cracks, ACFM is used for the evaluation and monitoring of existing cracks. ACFM uses a probe similar to an eddy current probe and introduces an alternating current in a thin skin near to the surface of any conductor. When a uniform current is introduced into the area under test, if it is defect free, the current is undisturbed.

•

•

If the area has a crack present, the current flows around the ends and the faces of the crack. A magnetic field is present above the surface associated with this uniform alternating current and will be disturbed if a surface-breaking crack is present.

Spend time becoming familiar with the various NDE methods and their proper applications. If you are familiar with most of the NDE methods then concentrate on those you may not have been exposed to, such as ACFM.

274

10 Metallurgy

Solid metals are crystalline in nature and all have a structure in which the atoms of each crystal are arranged in a specific geometric pattern. The physical properties of metallic materials including strength, ductility and toughness can be attributed to the chemical make-up and orderly arrangement of these atoms. •

Metals in molten or liquid states have no orderly arrangement to the atoms contained in the melt. As the melt cools, a temperature is reached at which clusters of atoms bond with each other and start to solidify developing into solid crystals within the melt. The individual crystals of pure metal are identical except for their orientation and are called grains.

•

As the temperature is reduced further, these crystals change in form eventually touch and where the grains touch an irregular transition layer of atoms is formed, which is called the grain boundary. Eventually the entire melt solidifies, interlocking the grains into a solid metallic structure called a casting.

•

Knowledge of cast structures is important since the welding process is somewhat akin to making a casting in a foundry.

•

Because of the similarity in the shape of its grains, a weld can be considered a small casting.

•

A solidified weld may have a structure that looks very much like that of a cast piece of equipment. However, the thermal conditions that are experienced during welding produce a cast structure with characteristics unique to welding. 10.2.3 Welding Metallurgy

We will begin our discussion here with Welding Metallurgy. Previous sections about the structures of metals are very general in nature, reading these a time or two should be sufficient preparation.

275

Some Important Points •

Most typical weld metals are rapidly solidified and, like the structure of a casting described earlier, usually solidify in the same manner as a casting and have a fine grain dendritic micro structure.

•

The solidified weld metal is a mixture of melted base metal and deposited weld filler metal, if used.

•

The heat-affected zone (HAZ) is adjacent to the weld and is that portion of the base metal that has not been melted, but whose mechanical properties or microstructure have been altered by the preheating temperature and the heat of welding.

•

There will typically be a change in grain size or grain structure and hardness in the HAZ of steel.

•

The size or width of the HAZ is dependent on the heat input used during welding.

•

For carbon steels, the HAZ includes those regions heated to greater than 1350°F (700°C). Each weld pass applied will have its own HAZ and the overlapping heat affected zones will extend through the full thickness of the plate or part welded.

•

The third component in a welded joint is the base metal.

•

The physical properties of base metals, filler metals and alloys being joined can have an influence on the efficiency and applicability of a welding process.

•

Examples of physical properties of a metal are the melting temperature, the thermal conductivity, electrical conductivity, the coefficient of thermal expansion, and density. Summary

Spend time with this material; questions would be expected to few and fairly simple on this material. However do not neglect it all together.

276

11 Refineries and Petrochemical Plant Welding Issues 11.1 General

This section provides details of specific welding issues encountered by the inspector in refineries and petrochemical plants. 11.2 Hot Tapping and In-Service Welding •

API Publication 2201 provides an in depth review of the safety aspects to be considered.

•

The following is a brief summary of welding related issues.

•

Two primary concerns when welding on in-service piping and equipment are burn through and cracking.

•

Burn through will occur if the un-melted area beneath the weld pool can no longer contain the pressure within the pipe or equipment.

•

Weld cracking results when fast weld-cooling rates produce a hard, crack-susceptible weld microstructure.

•

Fast cooling rates can be caused by flowing contents inside the piping and equipment, which remove heat quickly. 11.2.1 Electrode Considerations

•

Hot tap and in-service welding operations should be carried out only with low-hydrogen consumables and electrodes (e.g., E7016, E7018 and E7048).

•

Extra-low-hydrogen consumables such as Exxxx-H4 should be used for welding carbon steels with CE greater than 0.43% or where there is potential for hydrogen assisted cracking (HAC) such as cold worked pieces, high strength, and highly constrained areas.

•

Cellulosic type electrodes (e.g., E6010, E6011 or E7010) may be used for root and hot passes.

•

Root pass with low-hydrogen electrodes reduces risk of Hydrogen Assisted Cracking (HAC). It also reduces risk of burn through.

11.2.1 Electrode Considerations

It should be noted that cellulosic electrodes have the following adverse effects on the integrity of the weldment: a. Deep penetration, therefore higher risk of burn-through than low-hydrogen electrodes; and b. High diffusible hydrogen, therefore higher risk of hydrogen assisted cracking.

277

11.2.2 Flow Rates

Under most conditions, it is desirable to maintain some product flow inside of any material being welded. This helps to dissipate the heat and to limit the metal temperature. Liquid flow rates in piping shall be between 1.3 ft/ sec. and 4.0 ft/sec. (0.4 m/sec. and 1.3 m/sec.). Faster liquid flow rates may cool the weld area too quickly and thereby cause hard zones that are susceptible to weld cracking or low toughness properties in the weldment. Because this is not a problem when the pipe contains gases, there is no need to specify a maximum velocity. If the normal flow of liquids exceeds these values or if the flow cools the metal to below dew point, it is advisable to compensate by preheating the weld area to at least 70°F (20°C) and maintaining that temperature until the weld has been completed. Some Important Points •

Welding on a line under no-flow conditions or intermittent flow conditions, e.g., a flare line, shall not be attempted unless it has been confirmed that no explosive or flammable mixture will be present.

•

It shall be confirmed that no ingress of oxygen in the line is possible. In cases where this requirement cannot be met, inert gas or nitrogen purging is recommended.

•

An appropriate flow rate should be maintained to minimize the possibility of burn-through or combustion. The minimum flow rate is 1.3 ft/sec. (0.4 m/sec.) for liquid and gas.

•

For liquids, the maximum flow rate usually required to minimize risk of high hardness weld zone due to fast cooling rate. There is no restriction in maximum velocity for gas lines, subject to maintaining preheat temperatures. 11.2.3 Other Considerations

To avoid overheating and burn through, the welding procedure specification should be based on experience in performing welding operations on similar piping or equipment, and/or be based on heat transfer analysis. Many users establish procedures detailing the minimum wall thickness that can be hot tapped or welded in-service for a given set of conditions like pressure, temperature, and flow rate. To minimize burn through, the first weld pass to equipment or piping less than 1/4 in. (6.35 mm) thick should be made with 3/32 in. (4.76 mm) or smaller diameter welding electrode to limit heat input. For equipment and piping wall thicknesses where burn through is not a primary concern, a larger diameter electrode can be used. Weaving the bead should also be avoided as this increases the heat input. Adverse effects can also occur from the heat on the process fluid. In addition, welds associated with hot taps or in-service welding often cannot be stress relieved and may be susceptible to cracking in certain environments.

278

Any hot tapping or in-service welding on systems containing those listed in Table 13 should be carefully reviewed. Substance Acetylene

Hot Tapping/ In-Service Welding Hazard Explosion or unstable reaction with the addition of localized heat.

Acetonitrile

Explosion or unstable reaction with the addition of localized heat.

Amines and caustic

Stress corrosion cracking due to high thermal stress upon the addition of localized heat and high hardness of non-PWHT’s Weld. Hydrogen embrittlement Explosion or unstable reaction Carbon Steel will burn in the presence of chlorine and high heat

Butadiene Chlorine Compressed Air Ethylene Ethylene Oxide Hydrogen Hydrogen Sulfide (wet H2S) Hydrofluoric Acid Oxygen Propylene Propylene Oxide Steam

Combustion /metal burning Exothermic decomposition or explosion Exothermic decomposition or explosion High temperature hydrogen attack Hydrogen assisted cracking Stress corrosion cracking due to high hardness of non-PWHT’s weld. Hydrogen embrittlement. Pyrophoric scale. Hazardous substance. Combustion/metal burning Explosion or unstable reaction Explosion or unstable reaction High pressure steam can blow out.

279

11.2.4 Inspection Some Important Points

Inspection tasks typically associated with hot tapping or welding on in-service equipment should include: a. Verifying adequate wall thickness along the lengths of the proposed welds typically using UT or RT. b. Verifying the welding procedure. Often, plants have welding procedures qualified specifically for hot taps and in service welding. c. Verifying flow conditions. d. Specifying the sequence of welding full encirclement sleeves and fittings (circumferential and longitudinal welds). e. Verifying fit-up of the hot tap fitting. f. Auditing welding to assure the welding procedure is being followed. g. Perform NDE of completed welds. Typically this includes VT, UT shear wave using special procedures for the joint configuration, MT or PT as applicable for material and temperature. h. Witness leak testing of fitting, if specified.

280

11.3 Lack of Fusion with GMAW-S Welding Process

A large quantity of ASTM A 106, Grade B Pipe, 4 in. through 10 in. was found to have lack of fusion (LOF) after being fabricated using the GMAW-S welding process. This piping was in normal fluid service and required 5% radiographic examination. Initially the radiographic film was read acceptable, but LOF it is not easily interpreted by most radiographers. During this piping project, a weld was found to have lack of fusion while modifying a spool piece. The cut through the weld revealed the defect. Follow-up investigation and further examination indicated the root pass was acceptable in all cases, but subsequent weld passes exhibited LOF when a radiographer experienced in this particular discontinuity, read the film. ASME B31.3 considers LOF a defect. The gas metal arc welding (GMAW) process can utilize various metal transfer modes. When using the low voltage, short circuiting mode (designated by the -S extension), the molten weld puddle is able to freeze more quickly. This allows the unique ability to weld out of position, to weld thin base metals, and to weld open butt root passes. Due to this inherent nature of the welding process the BPV Code Section IX, restricts this process by: a. Requiring welders qualify with mechanical testing rather than by radiographic examination. b. Limiting the base metal thickness qualified by the procedure to 1.1 times the test coupon thickness for coupons less than 1/2 in. thick (12.7 mm) per variable QW-403.10. c. Limiting the deposited weld metal thickness qualified by the procedure to 1.1 times the deposited thickness for coupons less than 1/2 in. thick (12.7 mm) per variable QW-404-32. d. Making variable QW-409.2 an essential variable when qualifying a welder for the GMAW-S process.

281

Section 18 RP 571 Damage Mechanism Affecting Fixed Equipment in the Refining Industry

Lesson 18 RP 571 Damage Mechanisms Affecting Fixed Equipment in the Refining Industry

The following lesson will give an example a type of failure from each section and category listed on the API 510 exam Body of Knowledge. This will only be a brief introduction, a practice exercise covering all of the topics has been provided in the study material. The damage mechanisms are divided into the following categories: a) Mechanical and Metallurgical Failure b) Uniform or Localized Loss of Thickness c) High Temperature Corrosion d) Environment Assisted Cracking e) Refinery Industry Damage Mechanisms From these four groups you are responsible for; a) Mechanical and Metallurgical Failure • • • • •

4.2.3 – Temper Embrittlement 4.2.7 – Brittle Fracture 4.2.9 – Thermal Fatigue 4.2.14 – Erosion/Erosion-Corrosion 4.2.16 – Mechanical Failure

b) Uniform or Localized Loss of Thickness • • • •

4.3.2 – Atmospheric Corrosion 4.3.3 – Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI) 4.3.4 – Cooling Water Corrosion 4.3.5 – Boiler Water Condensate Corrosion

c) High Temperature Corrosion • 4.4.2 – Sulfidation d) Environment Assisted Cracking • • •

4.5.1 – Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking (Cl-SCC) 4.5.2 – Corrosion Fatigue 4.5.3 – Caustic Stress Corrosion Cracking (Caustic Embrittlement)

e) Refinery Industry Damage Mechanisms 1. Environment Assisted • 5.1.2.3 – Wet H2S Damage Blistering/HIC/SOHIC/SCC) 2. Other Mechanisms • 5.1.3.1 – High Temperature Hydrogen Attack (HTHA)

282

Mechanical and Metallurgical Failure 4.2.3 Temper Embrittlement Description of Damage •

Temper embrittlement is the reduction in toughness due to a metallurgical change that can occur in some low alloy steels as a result of long term exposure in the temperature range of about 650 o F to 1100 oF (343 oC to 593oC).

•

Although the loss of toughness is not evident at operating temperature, equipment that is temper embrittled may be susceptible to brittle fracture during start-up and shutdown. Affected Materials

•

Primarily 2.25Cr-1Mo low alloy steel, 3Cr-1Mo (to a lesser extent), and the high-strength low alloy Cr- Mo-V rotor steels.

•

Older generation 2.25Cr-1Mo materials manufactured prior to 1972 may be particularly susceptible. Some high strength low alloy steels are also susceptible.

•

The C-0.5Mo and 1.25Cr-0.5Mo alloy steels are not significantly affected by temper embrittlement. Affected Units or Equipment

Equipment susceptible to temper embrittlement is most often found in: • • • •

Hydroprocessing units, particularly reactors. Hot feed/effluent exchanger components, and hot HP separators. Catalytic reforming units (reactors and exchangers), FCC reactors, coker and visbreaking units. Welds in these alloys are often more susceptible than the base metal and should be evaluated.

283

Appearance of Damage •

Temper embrittlement is a metallurgical change that is not readily apparent and can be confirmed through impact testing. Damage due to temper embrittlement may result in catastrophic brittle fracture.

•

Temper embrittlement can be identified by an upward shift in the ductile-to-brittle transition temperature measured in a Charpy V-notch impact test, as compared to the non-embrittled or deembrittled material. Inspection and Monitoring

•

A common method of monitoring is to install blocks of original heats of the alloy steel material inside the reactor. Samples are periodically removed from these blocks for impact testing to monitor progress of temper embrittlement or until a major repair issue arises.

•

Process conditions should be monitored to ensure that a proper pressurization sequence is followed to help prevent brittle fracture due to temper embrittlement.

284

Uniform or Localized Loss of Thickness 4.3.2 Atmospheric Corrosion Description of Damage •

•

A form of corrosion that occurs from moisture associated with atmospheric conditions. Marine environments and moist polluted industrial environments with airborne contaminants are most severe. Dry rural environments cause very little corrosion. Affected Materials Carbon steel, low alloy steels and copper alloyed aluminum. Affected Units or Equipment

• • • • • •

Piping and equipment with operating temperatures sufficiently low to allow moisture to be present. Paint or coating system in poor condition. Equipment may be susceptible if cycled between ambient and higher or lower operating temperatures. Equipment shut down or idled for prolonged periods unless properly mothballed. Tanks and piping are particularly susceptible. Piping that rests on pipe supports is very prone to attack due to water entrapment between the pipe and the support. Bimetallic connections such as copper to aluminum electrical connections. Appearance

• • • •

The attack will be general or localized, depending upon whether or not the moisture is trapped. If there is no coating or if there is a coating failure, corrosion or loss in thickness can be general. Localized coating failures will tend to promote corrosion. Metal loss may not be visually evident, although normally a distinctive iron oxide (red rust) scale forms. Inspection and Monitoring

•

VT and UT are techniques that can be used. High Temperature Corrosion [400oF (204oC)] Sulfidation (Also known as Sulfidic Corrosion) Description of Damage

Corrosion of carbon steel and other alloys resulting from their reaction with sulfur compounds in high temperature environments. The presence of hydrogen accelerates corrosion. Affected Materials • •

All iron based materials including carbon steel and low alloy steels, 300 Series SS and 400 Series SS. Nickel base alloys are also affected to varying degrees depending on composition, especially chromium content.

285

•

Copper base alloys form sulfide at lower temperatures than carbon steel. Affected Units or Equipment

• • • •

Sulfidation occurs in piping and equipment in high temperature environments where sulfurcontaining streams are processed. Common areas of concern are the crude, FCC, coker, vacuum, visbreaker and hydroprocessing units. Heaters fired with oil, gas, coke and most other sources of fuel may be affected depending on sulfur levels in the fuel. Boilers and high temperature equipment exposed to sulfur-containing gases can be affected. Appearance of Damage

• •

Depending on service conditions, corrosion is most often in the form of uniform thinning but can also occur as localized corrosion or high velocity erosion-corrosion damage. A sulfide scale will usually cover the surface of components. Deposits may be thick or thin depending on the alloy, corrosiveness of the stream, fluid velocities and presence of contaminants Sulfidation Failure in an Elbow

Inspection and Monitoring •

Process conditions should be monitored for increasing temperatures and/or changing sulfur levels.

•

Temperatures can be monitored through the use of tube skin thermocouples and/or infrared thermography.

•

Evidence of thinning can be detected using external ultrasonic thickness measurements and profile radiography.

•

Proactive and retroactive PMI programs are used for alloy verification and to check for alloy mixups in services where Sulfidation is anticipated.

286

Environment – Assisted Cracking Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking

A cracking process that requires the simultaneous action of a corrodent and sustained tensile stress This excludes corrosion-reduced sections that fail by fast fracture. It also excludes intercrystalline or transcrystalline corrosion, which can disintegrate an alloy without applied or residual stress. Stresscorrosion cracking may occur in combination with hydrogen embrittlement. Description of Damage

Surface initiated cracks caused by environmental cracking of 300 Series Stainless Steel and some nickel base alloys under the combined action of: • tensile stress • temperature • Aqueous chloride environment. • The presence of dissolved oxygen increases chances for cracking. Affected Materials •

All 300 Series Stainless Steels are highly susceptible. b) Duplex stainless steels are more resistant. c) Nickel base alloys are highly resistant. Affected Units or Equipment

• • •

All 300 Series SS piping and pressure vessel components in any process units are susceptible to CUl-SCC. Cracking has occurred in water-cooled condensers and in the process side of crude tower overhead condensers. Drains in hydroprocessing units are susceptible to cracking during startup/shutdown if not properly purged.

287

Appearance of Damage • • • • • •

Surface breaking cracks can occur from the process side or externally under insulation. The material usually shows no visible signs of corrosion. Characteristic stress corrosion cracks have many branches and may be visually detectable by a craze/cracked appearance of the surface. Metallography of cracked samples typically shows branched transgranular cracks. Sometimes intergranular cracking of sensitized 300 Series SS may also be seen. Welds in 300 Series SS usually contain some ferrite, producing a duplex structure that is usually more resistant to CUl – SCC. Fracture surfaces often have a brittle appearance. External cracking of 304 Stainless Steel instrument tubing

4.5.1.7 Inspection and Monitoring •

Cracking is surface connected and may be detected visually in some cases.

•

PT or phase analysis EC techniques are the preferred methods.

•

Eddy current inspection methods have also been used on condenser tubes as well as piping and pressure vessels.

•

Extremely fine cracks may be difficult to find with PT. Special surface preparation methods, including polishing or high-pressure water blast, may be required in some cases, especially in high pressure services. UT.

• •

Often, RT is not sufficiently sensitive to detect cracks except in advanced stages where a significant network of cracks has developed.

288

Refining Industry Damage Mechanisms Environment – Assisted Cracking Wet H2S Damage (Blistering/HIC/SOHIC/SSC) Description of Damage

This section describes four types of damage that result in blistering and/or cracking of carbon steel and low alloy steels in wet H2S environments. Hydrogen Blistering • • • •

Hydrogen blisters may form as surface bulges on the ID, the OD or within the wall thickness of a pipe or vessel. The blister results from hydrogen atoms that form during the sulfide corrosion process on the surface of the steel, that diffuse into the steel, and collect at a discontinuity in the steel such as an inclusion or lamination. The hydrogen atoms combine to form hydrogen molecules and the pressure builds to the point where blister forms. Blistering results from hydrogen generated by corrosion, not hydrogen gas from the process stream. Hydrogen blistering and Hydrogen Induced cracking damage

289

Hydrogen Blistering

290

Wet H2S Damage (Blistering/HIC/SOHIC/SSC) Hydrogen Induced Cracking (HIC) •

Hydrogen blisters can form at many different depths from the surface of the steel, in the middle of the plate or near a weld. In some cases, neighboring or adjacent blisters that are at slightly different depths (planes) may develop cracks that link them together. Interconnecting cracks between the blisters often have a stair step appearance, and so HIC is sometimes referred to as “stepwise cracking”

Hydrogen Induced Cracking (HIC) Cross-section of plate showing HIC damage in the shell of a trim cooler which had been cooling vapors off a HHPS vessel in a hydroprocessing unit.

291

Stress Oriented Hydrogen Induced Cracking (SOHIC) •

SOHIC is similar to HIC but is a potentially more damaging form of cracking which appears as arrays of cracks stacked on top of each other. The result is a through-thickness crack that is perpendicular to the surface and is driven by high levels of stress (residual or applied). They usually appear in the base metal adjacent to the weld heat affected zones where they initiate from HIC damage or other cracks or defects including sulfide stress cracks.

Hydrogen blistering that is accompanied by SOHIC damage at the weld.

292

Wet H2S Damage (Blistering/HIC/SOHIC/SSC) Sulfide Stress Corrosion Cracking (SSC) •

Sulfide Stress Cracking (SSC) is defined as cracking of metal under the combined action of tensile stress and corrosion in the presence of water and H2S.

•

SSC is a form of hydrogen stress cracking resulting from absorption of atomic hydrogen that is produced by the sulfide corrosion process on the metal surface.

•

SSC can initiate on the surface of steels in highly localized zones of high hardness in the weld metal and heat affected zones.

•

Zones of high hardness can sometimes be found in weld cover passes and attachment welds which are not tempered (softened) by subsequent passes.

•

PWHT is beneficial in reducing the hardness and residual stresses that render a steel susceptible to SSC.

•

High strength steels are also susceptible to SSC but these are only used in limited applications in the refining industry.

•

Some carbon steels contain residual elements that form hard areas in the heat affected zones that will not temper at normal stress relieving temperatures. Using preheat helps minimize these hardness problems. SCC Damage of a Hard Weld

293

Affected Materials •

Carbon steel and low alloy steels. Affected Units or Equipment

• •

Blistering, HIC, SOHIC and SSC damage can occur throughout the refinery wherever there is a wet H2S environment present. In hydroprocessing units, typical locations include fractionator overhead drums, fractionation towers, absorber and stripper towers, compressor interstage separators and knockout drums and various heat exchangers, condensers, and coolers. Inspection and Monitoring

• • • •

Inspection for wet H2S damage generally focuses on weld seams and nozzles. Cracks may be seen visually, crack detection is best performed with WFMT, EC, RT or ACFM techniques. Surface preparation is required for WFMT but not for ACFM. PT cannot find tight cracks and should not be depended on. UT techniques including external SWUT can be used. SWUT is especially useful for volumetric inspection and crack sizing. Grinding out the crack or removal by thermal arc gouging is a viable method of crack depth determination.

294

Refinery Industry Other Mechanisms High Temperature Hydrogen Attack (HTHA) Description of Damage • • •

High temperature hydrogen attack results from exposure to hydrogen at elevated temperatures and pressures. The hydrogen reacts with carbides in steel to form methane (CH4) which cannot diffuse through the steel. Methane pressure builds up, forming bubbles or cavities, micro fissures and fissures that may combine to form cracks. Failure can occur when the cracks reduce the load carrying ability of the pressure containing part.

Affected Materials In order of increasing resistance: 1. Carbon steel 2. C-0.5Mo 3. Mn-0.5Mo 4. 1Cr-0.5Mo 5. 1.25Cr-0.5Mo 6. 2.25Cr-1Mo 7. 2.25Cr-1Mo-V 8. 3Cr-1Mo 9. 5Cr-0.5Mo and similar steels with variations in chemistry. Affected Units • •

Hydroprocessing units, such as hydrotreaters (desulfurizers) and hydrocrackers, catalytic reformers, hydrogen producing units and hydrogen cleanup units, such as pressure swing absorption units, are all susceptible to HTHA. Boiler tubes in very high pressure steam service.

295

Appearance of Damage • • • • •

HTHA can be confirmed through the use of specialized techniques including metallographic analysis. In the early stages of HTHA, bubbles/cavities can be detected in samples by a scanning microscope. In later stages of damage, decarburization and/or fissures can be seen by examining samples under a microscope and may sometimes be seen by in-situ metallography. Cracking and fissuring are intergranular and occur adjacent to pearlite (iron carbide) areas in carbon steels. Some blistering may be visible to the naked eye. Inspection and Monitoring

• • • • •

Damage may occur randomly in welds or weld heat affected zones as well as the base metal, making detection of HTHA extremely difficult. Ultrasonic techniques using a combination of velocity ratio and backscatter have been the most successful in finding fissuring and/or serious cracking. Visual inspection for blisters on the inside surface may indicate methane formation and potential HTHA. HTHA may occur without the formation of surface blisters. Other forms of inspection, including WFMT and RT, are severely limited in their ability to detect anything except damage where cracking has already developed.

296

Section 19 API 510 Pressure Testing and Welded Repairs

Lesson 19 API 510 Pressure Testing and Welded Repairs

This overview will be restricted primarily to a small part of Sections 6 and 7of the API 510 the subject matter that is the most difficult to understand and those items in API 510 that give rules different from those given in the ASME Code Sections. Other subject material such as, scope of the 510, definitions and, responsibilities are covered by practice exercises, practice exams and most importantly, the students reading of the API 510 document. 5.8 Pressure Testing 5.8.1 When to Perform a Pressure Test 5.8.1.1 Pressure tests are not normally conducted as part of routine inspection. A pressure test is normally required after an alteration. After repairs are completed, a pressure test shall be applied if the inspector believes that one is necessary. Alternatives to pressure tests are outlined in 5.8.7. 5.8.1.2 Pressure tests are typically performed on an entire vessel. However, where practical, pressure tests of vessel components/ sections can be performed in lieu of entire vessels (e.g. a new nozzle). An engineer should be consulted when a pressure test of vessel components/sections is to be performed to ensure it is suitable for the intended purpose. 5.8.2 Test Pressure 5.8.2.1 When a code hydrostatic pressure test is required, the minimum test pressure should be in accordance with the rules of the rating code (construction code used to determine the MAWP)**. For this purpose, the minimum test pressure for vessels that have been rerated using the design allowable stress published in the 1999 addendum or later of ASME Section VIII: Division I, Code Case 2290, or Code Case 2278, is 130% of MAWP and corrected for temperature. The minimum test pressure for vessels rerated using the design allowable stress of ASME Section VIII: Division I, published prior to the 1999 addendum, is 150% of MAWP and corrected for temperature. The minimum test pressure for vessels designed using ASME Section VIII: Division 1 is as follows:

Test Pressure in psi (MPa) = 1.5 MAWP × (Stest temp/Sdesign temp), prior to 1999 addendum Test Pressure in psi (MPa) = 1.3 MAWP × (Stest temp/Sdesign temp), 1999 addendum and later Where; Stest temp = allowable stress at test temperature in ksi (MPa) Sdesign temp = allowable stress at design temperature in ksi (MPa) ** This means if a vessel was constructed to an edition of the ASME Code or any other Code that requires a different multiplier than 1.3 (hydro) or 1.1 (pneumatic) then the original multiplier should be used. 5.8.2.2 When a non-code related pressure test is performed after repairs, the test pressure may be conducted at pressures determined by the owner/user.

298

5.8.3 Pressure Test Preparation 5.8.3.1 Before applying a pressure test, appropriate precautions and procedures should be taken to assure the safety of personnel involved with the pressure test. A close visual inspection of pressure vessel components should not be performed until the vessel pressure is at or below the MAWP. This review is especially important for in-service pressure vessels. 5.8.3.2 When a pressure test is to be conducted in which the test pressure will exceed the set pressure of the pressure-relieving device(s), the pressure-relieving device(s) should be removed. An alternative to removing the pressure-relieving device (s) is to use test clamps to hold down the valve disks. Applying an additional load to the valve spring by turning the compression screw is prohibited. Other appurtenances, such as gauge glasses, pressure gauges, and rupture disks, that may be incapable of withstanding the test pressure should be removed or blanked off. When the pressure test has been completed, pressure-relieving devices and appurtenances removed or made inoperable during the pressure test shall be reinstalled or reactivated. 5.8.4 Hydrostatic Pressure Tests 5.8.4.1 Before applying a hydrostatic test, the supporting structures and foundation design should be reviewed to assure they are suitable for the hydrostatic load. 5.8.4.2 Hydrostatic pressure tests of equipment having components of Type 300 series stainless steel should be conducted with potable water or steam condensate having a chloride concentration of less than 50 ppm. After the test, the vessel should be completely drained and dried. The inspector should verify the specified water quality is used and that the vessel has been drained and dried. 5.8.5 Pneumatic Pressure Tests

Pneumatic testing (including combined hydro-pneumatic) may be used when hydrostatic testing is impracticable because of limited supporting structure or foundation, refractory linings, or process reasons. When used, the potential personnel and property risks of pneumatic testing shall be considered by an inspector or engineer before conducting the test. As a minimum, the inspection precautions contained in the ASME Code shall be applied when performing any pneumatic test. As a minimum, the inspection precautions contained in the ASME Code shall be applied in any pneumatic testing (NDE of UW-50 and brought up in steps of 1/10 beginning at half way to test pressure). 5.8.6 Test Temperature and Brittle Fracture Considerations 5.8.6.1 At ambient temperatures, carbon, low-alloy, and other ferritic steels may be susceptible to brittle failure. A number of failures have been attributed to brittle fracture of steels that were exposed to temperatures below their transition temperature and to pressures greater than 20% of the required hydrostatic test pressure. Most brittle fractures, however, have occurred on the first application of a high stress level (the first hydrostatic or overload). The potential for a brittle failure shall be evaluated prior to hydrostatic or especially prior to pneumatic testing because or the higher potential energy involved. Special attention should be given when testing low-alloy steels, especially 2-1/4 Cr-1Mo, because they may be prone to temper embrittlement.

299

5.8.6.2 To minimize the risk of brittle fracture during a pressure test, the metal temperature should be maintained at least **30ºF (17ºC) above the MDMT for vessels that are more than 2 in. (5 cm) thick, and 10ºF (6ºC) above the MDMT for vessels that have a thickness of 2 in. (5 cm) or less. The test temperature need not exceed 120ºF (50ºC) unless there is information on the brittle characteristics of the vessel material indicating a higher test temperature is needed. ** This differs from the ASME which recommends 30°F in all thicknesses. Use the API rules for the exam. 5.8.7 Pressure Testing Alternatives 5.8.7.1 Appropriate NDE shall be specified and conducted when a pressure test is not performed after a major repair or alteration. Substituting NDE procedures for a pressure test after an alteration may be done only after the engineer and inspector have approved. 5.8.7.2 For cases where UT is substituted for radiographic inspection, the owner/user shall specify industry-qualified UT shear wave examiners or the application of Code Case 2235, as applicable, for closure welds that have not been pressure tested and for welding repairs identified by the engineer or inspector.

300

SECTION 8—REPAIRS, ALTERATIONS, AND RERATING OF PRESSURE VESSELS 8.1 Repairs and Alterations

All repairs and alterations shall be performed by a repair organization in accordance with the applicable principles of the ASME Code, or the applicable construction or repair code. Repairs to pressure-relieving devices should follow API 576. The repair organization must follow all applicable safety requirements as designated in 5.3. 5.3 Consists of the following topics; The following should be checked prior to use; Equipment • • • •

All tools, equipment, and personal protective equipment. Nondestructive examination equipment and the repair organization’s equipment is subject to the owner/user’s safety requirements for electrical equipment. Other equipment that might be needed for the vessel work, such as planking, scaffolding, and portable ladders, should be checked before being used. Personal protective equipment shall be worn when required either by regulations, the owner/user, or the repair organization.

Communication • •

Before starting any vessel inspection and maintenance activities (NDE, pressure testing, repair, or alteration) personnel should obtain permission to work in the vicinity from operating personnel responsible for the pressure vessel. When individuals are inside a vessel, all persons working around the vessel should be informed that people are working inside the vessel. Individuals working inside the vessel should be informed when any work is going to be done on the vessel’s exterior.

Vessel Entry • • •

Prior to entering a vessel, the vessel shall be isolated from all sources of liquids, gases, vapors, radiation, and electricity. The vessel should be drained, purged, cleaned, ventilated, and gas tested before it is entered. Procedures to ensure continuous safe ventilation and precautions to ensure safe egress/emergency evacuation of personnel from the vessel should be clear. Documentation of these precautions is required prior to any vessel entry. Before entering a vessel, individuals must obtain permission from the responsible operating personnel. Where required, personnel protective equipment shall be worn that will protect the eyes, lungs, and other parts of the body from specific hazards that may exist in the vessel.

Records Review •

Before performing any of the required API 510 inspections, inspectors shall familiarize themselves with prior history of the vessels for which they are responsible. In particular, they should review the vessel’s prior inspection results, prior repairs, current inspection plan, and/or other similar service inspections. A general overview of the types of damage and failure modes experienced by pressure equipment is provided in API 571 and API 579, Appendix G.

301

Preheat or Controlled Deposition Welding Methods as Alternatives to Postweld Heat Treatment Definition Controlled Deposition 3.11 controlled-deposition welding: • • •

Any welding technique used to obtain controlled grain refinement and tempering of the underlying heat affected zone (HAZ) in the base metal. Various controlled-deposition techniques, such as temper-bead (tempering of the layer below the current bead being deposited) and half-bead (requiring removal of one-half of the first layer), are included. Controlled-deposition welding requires control of the entire welding procedure including the joint detail, preheating and post heating, welding technique, and welding parameters. Refer to supporting technical information found in Welding Research Council Bulletin 412. Preheat/Controlled Deposition Benefits

• • •

May allow welded repairs to a vessel that was constructed to the ASME Section VIII Div.1 which required PWHT to be repaired without further PWHT of the vessel’s material. Preheat and controlled deposition welding, as described in 7.2.3.1 and 7.2.3.2, may be used in lieu of post-weld heat treatment where PWHT is inadvisable or mechanically unnecessary. Prior to using any alternative method, a metallurgical review conducted by a pressure vessel engineer shall be performed.

•

The review should consider factors such as the reason for the original PWHT of the equipment, susceptibility of the service to promote stress corrosion cracking, stresses in the location of the weld, susceptibility to high temperature hydrogen attack, susceptibility to creep, etc.

•

Selection of the welding method used shall be based on the rules of the construction code applicable to the work planned along with technical consideration of the adequacy of the weld in the as-welded condition at operating and pressure test conditions.

302

8.1.6.4.2 Preheat or Controlled Deposition Welding Methods as Alternatives to Postweld Heat Treatment 8.1.6.4.2.1 General 8.1.6.4.2.1.1 Preheat and controlled deposition welding, as described in 8.1.6.4.2.2 and 8.1.6.4.2.3, may be used in lieu of PWHT where PWHT is inadvisable or mechanically unnecessary. Prior to using any alternative method, a metallurgical review conducted by an engineer shall be performed to assure the proposed alternative is suitable for the application. The review should consider factors such as the reason for the original PWHT of the equipment, susceptibility to stress corrosion cracking, stresses in the location of the weld, susceptibility to high temperature hydrogen attack, susceptibility to creep, etc. 8.1.6.4.2.1.2 Selection of the welding method used shall be based on the rules of the construction code applicable to the work planned along with technical consideration of the adequacy of the weld in the as-welded condition at operating and pressure test conditions. 8.1.6.4.2.1.3 When reference is made in this section to materials by the ASME designation, PNumber and Group Number, the requirements of this section apply to the applicable materials of the original code of construction, either ASME or other, which conform by chemical composition and mechanical properties to the ASME P-Number and Group Number designations. 8.1.6.4.2.1.4 Vessels constructed of steels other than those listed in 8.1.6.4.2.2 and 8.1.6.4.2.3, that initially required PWHT, shall be postweld heat treated if alterations or repairs involving pressure boundary welding are performed. When one of the following methods is used as an alternative to PWHT, the **PWHT joint efficiency factor may be continued if the factor has been used in the currently rated design.

** This statement is unclear, but it appears to indicate if a particular P-number such as SA-240 Type 405 P-number 7, when welded with straight chromium electrodes, and to Types 410, 429, and 430 welded with any electrode, shall be radiographed in all thicknesses as requirement of ASME Section VIII Div. 1 paragraph UHA 33. The final radiographs of all straight chromium ferritic welds including major repairs to these welds shall be made after postweld heat treatment has been performed. So this API statement seems to waive the PWHT radiography requirement.

303

8.1.6.4.2.2 Preheating Method (Notch Toughness Testing Not Required) 8.1.6.4.2.2.1 The preheating method, when performed in lieu of PWHT, is limited to the following materials and weld processes:

a. The materials shall be limited to P-No. 1, Group 1, 2, and 3, and to P-No. 3, Group 1 and 2 (excluding Mn-Mo steels in Group 2). b. The welding shall be limited to the shielded-metal-arc welding (SMAW), gas-metal-arc welding (GMAW), and gas-tungsten arc welding (GTAW) processes. 8.1.6.4.2.2.2 The preheat method shall be performed as follows:

The weld area shall be preheated and maintained at a minimum temperature of 300°F (150°C) during welding. The 300°F (150°C) temperature should be checked to assure that 4 in. (100 mm) of the material or four times the material thickness (whichever is greater) on each side of the groove is maintained at the minimum temperature during welding. The maximum interpass temperature shall not exceed 600°F (315°C). When the weld does not penetrate through the full thickness of the material, the minimum preheat and maximum interpass temperatures need only be maintained at a distance of 4 in. (100 mm) or four times the depth of the repair weld, whichever is greater on each side of the joint. Note: Notch toughness testing is not required when using this preheat method in lieu of PWHT. 8.1.6.4.2.3 Controlled-deposition Welding Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)

The controlled-deposition welding method may be used in lieu of PWHT in accordance with the following: a. Notch toughness testing, such as that established by ASME Code Section VIII: Division 1, parts UG-84 and UCS-66, is necessary when impact tests are required by the original code of construction or the construction code applicable to the work planned. b. The materials shall be limited to P-No. 1, P-No. 3, and P-No. 4 steels. c. The welding shall be limited to the shielded-metal-arc welding (SMAW), gas-metal-arc welding (GMAW), and gas-tungsten arc welding (GTAW) processes. d. A weld procedure specification shall be developed and qualified for each application. The welding procedure shall define the preheat temperature and interpass temperature and include the post heating temperature requirement in f(8). The qualification thickness for the test plates and repair grooves shall be in accordance with Table 8-1. The test material for the welding procedure qualification shall be of the same material specification (including specification type, grade, class and condition of heat treatment) as the original material specification for the repair. If the original material specification is obsolete, the test material used should conform as much as possible to the material used for construction, but in no case shall the material be lower in strength or have a carbon content of more than 0.35%. e. When impact tests are required by the construction code applicable to the work planned, the PQR shall include sufficient tests to determine if the toughness of the weld metal and the heat-affected zone of the base metal in the as-welded condition is adequate at the minimum design metal temperature (such as the criteria used in ASME Code Section VIII: Division I, parts UG-84 and UCS 66). If special hardness limits are necessary (for example, as set forth in NACE RP 0472 and MR 0103) for corrosion resistance, the PQR shall include hardness tests as well.

304

f. The WPS shall include the following additional requirements: 1. The supplementary essential variables of ASME Code, Section IX, Paragraph QW-250, shall apply. 2. The maximum weld heat input for each layer shall not exceed that used in the procedure qualification test. 3. The minimum preheat temperature for welding shall not be less than that used in the procedure qualification test. 4. The maximum interpass temperature for welding shall not be greater than that used in the procedure qualification test. 5. The preheat temperature shall be checked to assure that 4 in. (100 mm) of the material or four times the material thickness (whichever is greater) on each side of the weld joint will be maintained at the minimum temperature during welding. When the weld does not penetrate through the full thickness of the material, the minimum preheat temperature need only be maintained at a distance of 4 in. (100 mm) or four times the depth of the repair weld, whichever is greater on each side of the joint. 6. For the welding processes in 8.1.6.4.2.3c, use only electrodes and filler metals that are classified by the filler metal specification with an optional supplemental diffusible-hydrogen designator of H8 or lower. When shielding gases are used with a process, the gas shall exhibit a dew point that is no higher than – 60°F (–50°C). Surfaces on which welding will be done shall be maintained in a dry condition during welding and free of rust, mill scale and hydrogen producing contaminants such as oil, grease and other organic materials. 7. The welding technique shall be a controlled-deposition, temper-bead or half-bead technique. The specific technique shall be used in the procedure qualification test. 8. For welds made by SMAW, after completion of welding and without allowing the weldment to cool below the minimum preheat temperature, the temperature of the weldment shall be raised to a temperature of 500°F ± 50°F (260°C ± 30°C) for a minimum period of two hours to assist out-gassing diffusion of any weld metal hydrogen picked up during welding. This hydrogen bake-out treatment may be omitted provided the electrode used is classified by the filler metal specification with an optional supplemental diffusible-hydrogen designator of H4 (such as E7018-H4). 9. After the finished repair weld has cooled to ambient temperature, the final temper bead reinforcement layer shall be removed substantially flush with the surface of the base material.

305

Example Coupon

Courtesy Sperko Engineering

306

Section 20 Lesson Quizzes

Class Quizzes Class Quiz #1 UW-2 Service Restrictions 1. Which of the following types of welds are required if a vessel is determined to be in lethal service? a. Category A and B welds shall be of Type 1. b. Category A and B welds must be of Type 1 or 2. c. Category A shall be of Type 1 only, B and C can be of Type 1 or Type 2. 2. Label these welds by Type.

_____________________________

___________________________

Class Quiz #2 UW -3 Welded Joint Category 1. The category of a joint depends on: a. What kind of weld was made, fillet or butt. b. The process used to make the weld. c. Whether it is vertical or horizontal in the vessel d. None of the above. 2. A circumferential weld to attach a flange is what Category? a. D b. C c. E d. A A circumferential weld used to attach a seamless head is of what Category? a. B b. C c. E d. A 4. The circumferential weld to attach a hemispherical head to a shell is a Category ____.

1

5. Label these weld joints by Category A, B, C or D

Class Quiz #3 UW-51 Radiographic and Radioscopic Examination 1. All welded joints to be radiographed shall be examined in accordance with _______of Section _____except as otherwise specified. 2. A complete set of radiographs and records shall be retained by the Manufacturer until the Manufacturer’s Data Report has been signed by the____________. a. Manufacturer b. Inspector c. Manufacturer and Inspector 3. While reviewing a radiograph an elongated indication was found to have a length of .375” in a .750” thick plate weld. This indication is Rejectable because the maximum allowed is _______ for this thickness. 4. The welded joint below was radiographed and found to have an elongated indication that was .243” in length. The maximum allowable length of an indication for this combination of thicknesses is ______ and this weld considered _______________. a. 1/3 t and this weld is considered acceptable. b. 1/4 in. and this weld is considered acceptable. c. 1/4 in. and this weld is considered rejectable.

2

5. The length L, of the longest imperfection in the figure below is .259”. Based on this value the largest imperfection is _________ and since the aggregate (total) length is .504” that is _________ but the weld is____________. a. acceptable - also acceptable - acceptable b. unacceptable - also unacceptable -rejectable c. unacceptable – acceptable – rejectable

6. In the figure below what is the minimum distance D, between these two groups of aligned imperfections for the groups to be evaluated separately? a. 7.5” b. 1.872” c. .312”

Class Quiz # 4 Spot Radiography 1. Minimum number of Spot Radiographs is/are __spot (s), this rule must be applied on each vessel for each _____ ft increment of weld or fraction thereof for which a joint efficiency from column (b) of Table UW-12 is selected. 2. Who shall choose the location of Spot Radiographs? a. The manufacturer and the Inspector will agree on the locations. b. The manufacturer or the Inspector depending on the type of welds made. c. The Inspector shall choose unless he is not available and then the Manufacturer may do so. 3. In the drawing below the total number of spot radiographs needed to meet the minimum requirements is/are ____? * Keep in mind the goal is to Radiographically Test every welder’s work in a 50’ increment.

3

Class Quiz # 5 UW-11 Radiographic and Ultrasonic Examinations In the drawing below the paragraph that applies is; a. UW-11(a)(1) Lethal Service b. UW-11(a)(2) Thickness limit exceeded c. UW-11(a)(5) The desire to take E from Column A of Table UW-12

2. In the drawing below the paragraph that applies is; a. UW-11(a)(1) Lethal Service b. UW-11(a)(2) Thickness exceeded c. UW-11(a)(5) Design using E from Col. A Table UW-12

t = 1.75"

t = 1.75"

t = 1.5" Full RT

t = 1.5"

4

Class Quiz # 6 UW-12 Joint Efficiencies 1. A Type 1 weld has received Spot Radiographic Testing the resulting Joint E _______? a. 1.0 b. 0.80 c. 0.85 2. A Type 3 weld can be spot radiographed. ___True

___False

3. A Type 2 weld has been Fully Radiographed; the Weld Joints E is ______. a. 0.85 b. 0.90 c. 0.80 4. A Type 2 weld has received Spot Radiographic Testing resulting in a Joint E of 0.80, this E could be improved to a 1.0 by _____________________. a. applying full radiography b. removing the backing and double welding and then applying Spot RT. c. removing the backing, double welding thus creating a Type 1, and then applying Full RT. Class Quiz # 7 UG-27 Internal Pressure Cylindrical Shells 1. Calculate the thickness required for a vessel’s seamless shell made of SA-106 gr. B pipe. The O.D. is 12.75 inches. UW-11(a)(5)(b) has been applied. The shell will operate at a maximum of 500 psi. The stress allowed on the shell material is 15,000 psi. The vessel will be stamped RT 2. From the question above fill in the givens below. Givens: t= P= S= E= R or Ro = State Code Paragraph and Formula:

SKETCH:

5

2. What is the maximum allowed working pressure on the following shell? The shell’s inside radius is 52 inches, and the shell’s thickness is .850 inches. The allowable stress for the shell's material is 15,000 psi. The joint efficiency of the shell's Category A joint is 1.0 From the question above fill in the givens below. Givens: SKETCH: t= P= S= E= R or Ro = State Code Paragraph and Formula: Class Quiz #8 1. A vertical vessel shell has an MAWP of 200 psi, and an allowable stress of 14,800 psi. The original inside radius was 84”. The nameplate is stamped RT1 . The shell has corroded down to 1.28 inches. Its original t was 1.375". What is its current calculated MAWP in accordance with rules of Section VIII Division 1? Givens: t = P= ? S= E= R=

Class Quiz #9 UG-32 Internal Pressure Formed Heads 1. Calculate the required thickness of a 2 to 1 Ellipsoidal head with an inside diameter of 48 inches. The vessels will have a MAWP of 350 psi and will be in lethal service and stamped RT1. The joint used to join the head to shell will be a Type No. 2 from Table UW-12. The stress allowed on the head's material will be 15,000 psi. Givens: SKETCH: t= P= S= E= D= State Code Paragraph and Formula:

6

Class Quiz # 9 2. A Torispherical head has corroded to a thickness of .353 " ; its inside crown radius is 56 inches. The head's material has a stress allowable of 13,800 psi. The shell is seamless and the spot radiography of UW-11(a)(5)(b) has been applied to the vessel. Can this head remain in service at 100 psi per Code? Givens: SKETCH: t= P= S= E= L= State Code Paragraph and Formula:

3. A Hemispherical head is being considered as a replacement on a vessel with a MAWP of 200 psi. The head's inside diameter will be 64 inches. What would be its required thickness if the head's material has a maximum allowable stress of 17,500 psi? The Category A type 1 joint that attaches the head will be spot radiographed. Givens: SKETCH: t= P= S= E= L= State Code Paragraph and Formula:

7

Class Quiz # 9 Continued 4. What would the required thickness for a seamless Ellipsoidal head be given the following variables? The Category B weld that will attach this head would not have UW-11(a)(5)(b) applied. Givens: t =? P = 200 psi S = 17,500 psi E = .85 No spot RT per UW-12(d) D = 64.0”

SKETCH:

Class Quiz #10 Hydrostatic Head of Water 1. What would be the pressure at the bottom of this vessel if an external pressure of 235 psi were applied? 235 psi

100 Feet

?

Class Quiz #11 Hydrostatic Head of Water 1. What would be the pressure at 16.5’ if the top read 410 psi instead of 400.125 ?

8

Class Quiz # 12 Hydrostatic Head of Water 1. What would be the hydrostatic pressure exerted at each point in the vessel below?

Class Quiz #13 Depth of Formed Heads 1. The depth of a 2 to 1 ellipsoidal head having a diameter of 64 inches and a 1-1/2” flange is; a. 33 -1/2” b. 16 -1/2” c. 17-1/2” 2. What is the depth of a hemispherical head attached to a vessel shell that has inside diameter of 96” with an internal fit up? a. 96” b. 48” c. 32”

9

Class Quiz #14 Pressure Testing UG-99/100/102 1. A vessel made of Stainless Steel is being hydrostatically tested after an alteration. The vessel's MAWP is 225 psi at 400 o F. The allowable stress at operating is 14,700 psi and 16,700 psi at the test temperature. Answer the following: a. What is the required test pressure? b. What is the least pressure for the inspection? c. In psi, what is the min. and max range of the test gage?

2. A pneumatic test of a vessel will be conducted to a pressure of 310 psi. Describe the 6 steps for raising the vessel to the test pressure. At what pressure shall the visual examination take place? Class Quiz #15 UCS 56 PWHT 1. In the example below what is the shortest amount of time allowed to raise the weldment to a PWHT of 1100 °F if the furnace is at 800°F when the part is inserted? Answer: ___________________________________

Class Quiz #16 UCS 56 PWHT 1. What is the minimum PWHT time and the minimum holding temperature for a P-Number 5A material that is 3” (inches) thick (75 mm)? 2. What is the PWHT normal holding temperature and time for a P-Number 3 material that is 3” (76 mm) thick? 3. What is the required time at the minimum holding temperature for a P-Number 1 Gr.1 weld that has a nominal governing thickness of 1-1/4” ? The vessel will not be in a lethal service.

10

Class Quiz #17 UCS 56.1 1. What is the total PWHT time at 950 oF for a 5 inch thick P-No 1 Group 2 material?

Lowered PWHT at 950 F

5 in (125 mm)

Class Quiz # 18 External Pressure UG-28 1. A vessel under external pressure has been found to a thickness of 1.123 ". The vessel is 8'-2" long and operates at a temperature of 300 oF. The vessel’s outside diameter is 54 inches. It is made of a material with a minimum yield of 30,000 psi. Presently the external working pressure is 350 psi. May this vessel continue to operate in accordance with the Code?

11

Class Quiz # 19 Charpy Impacts UCS-66 1. What is the lowest temperature that a 1.5 inch thickness Curve D material can be designed for without impact tests? Class Quiz #20 Charpy UCS-66.1 1. What would be the adjusted MDMT for a vessel 1.5” thick from Curve D with a Coincident Ratio of .90? Class Quiz # 21 Charpy Impacts UG-84 1. What specification must impact testing procedures conform to? 2. What type of Impact Test does the Code recognize? 3. What are the dimensions of a standard Charpy Impact specimen? 4. How many specimens comprise a single set? 5. How many sets of specimens are required for a weld procedure test coupon 1 3/4 inches thick? 6. When welding a procedure test plate for impact testing, what must the P No. and Group No. be? What type of heat treatment must be applied to the test plate? 7. Name the two types of test specimens required for all welding procedures. Hint: Where do they come from? Class Quiz #22 Fillet Welds and Reinforcement 1. A fillet weld has a leg size of 1 1/8". What is its throat size? 2. A fillet weld has a throat size of .600". What is its leg size rounded up to the next fractional 1/16"?

12

Class Quiz #23 Fillet Welds and Reinforcement 3. Using Fig. UW-16.1 sketch (i) determine the minimum leg size for the following based on the value of tmin = .750” You will need these two formulas; Leg Size =

Throat .707

And minimum throat is equal to

t 1 + t 2 ≥ 1 1 t min 4

Class Quiz #24 Reinforcement for Openings in Shells and Heads 1. When calculating reinforcement, from what parts must a corrosion allowance be deducted (where)? 2. As regards reinforcement how is the area A found? State the formula. 3. How many points is reinforcement calculations worth on the exam? How many points is hydrostatic test calculation worth on the exam?

Class Quiz #25 Just Milling Around 1. Convert the following decimal fractions into Mils. .195” = _____ Mils . 023” = _____ Mils .009” = _____ Mils. .0011” =_____ Mils. 2. Solve this Remaining Life problem using Mils. Corrosion Allowance .095“ = 14.2 Yrs. Remaining Life Corrosion Rate .0067" Class Quiz #26 Time 1. A vessel shell course was replaced in October 1st of 1980. The initial or, baseline thickness was .505”. The most recent actual thickness measured was .485” in January 1st 1991. What is the corrosion rate, based in Mils per year in January of 1991?

13

Class Quiz #27 Defining Each Essential Variable 1. An 8.5” T coupon was welded to produce a PQR to support welding of a reactor shell course. The maximum T qualified with this coupon is ___”.

Class Quiz #28 Base Metals 1. A 1”(25mm) to 1”(25mm) P-No.1 coupon was welded entirely by the SMAW process. The minimum thickness qualified is ___ and the maximum is ___”

Class Quiz # 29 Base Metals 2. A PQR coupon is 1-1/4”(1.250) thick (T). The weld will be made in three passes, the root pass/layer will be 1/4” (.250) thick and second and third layers/passes will be each be 1/2”(.500) thick. The maximum range of thickness for this qualification will be ________”.

Class Quiz # 30 Base Metals 3. Using the table QW-424 in Section IX list the base metals qualified if we successfully weld a procedure coupon joining P-No 5A to P-No 5A.

Class Quiz # 31 Welders Qualifications 1. If a welder qualified on a NPS 6 inch pipe coupon the range of diameter qualifications in production with the WPS he tested to will be _________. 2. If tested with a NPS 2 inch coupon what is his minimum and maximum diameter range is ________. Class Quiz #32 1. How can we qualify a welder for unlimited thickness with both F-No.3 and 4 in a single coupon? * Hint See Note 1 of table QW-452.1(b) If he welds a coupon that is at least ___ thick and deposits at least___ of E-6010 and at least ___ of E-7018 using a minimum of ____ layers of each filler metal.

14

Class Quiz # 33 Diameter/Position/Thickness/Progression A welder performs a test on a NPS 4” (4.5”) pipe coupon in the 6G position. The coupon is Schedule 160 and has a wall T of 0.531”. The welder will use SMAW with E-6010 for the root pass for a total weld deposit t of .125” (1/8”). The balance of the weld deposit t (.406”) will be performed using 3 weld layers of E-7018 filler metal. All welding will be uphill during the test. His qualifications as listed in table QW-353 are? The test qualifies ___ positions with a minimum diameter of ______ and a maximum of _______. The test also qualifies the welder to deposit ___ inches of F- No. 3 and ____inches of F-No.4. The welder will also be qualified to weld _____or _______ backing. The thickest weld he can make using this combination in production is__________. The welder’s production welds must made using _______ progression.

Class Quiz #34 Article 1 Section V 1. The acceptance standards for radiography and dye penetrant testing is found in the ____________________. 2. A written procedure is always needed for any NDE process when it is required by _____________________. 3. Who shall have the NDE procedure made available to them? a. The manufacturer of pressure vessels or piping. b. The Inspector only has this right. c. The manufacturer’s NDE personnel and the inspector upon request. Class Quiz #35 Article 2 1. The purpose of the using the Lead Letter B is to determine if ________________ is exposing the film. 2. The Lead Letter B is placed______________________. a. on the part b. on the back of the film cassette c. on the front of the film cassette 3. Film density is measured using a __________________. a. step wedge comparison block b. densitometer film c. Step wedge comparison film or a densitometer.

15

Class Quiz #36 Article 2 Section V 1. The thickness of a Hole Type IQI Designation #25 is_____ and the 4T hole diameter is ________. 2. The thickness of a Hole Type IQI Designation #7 is _____ and the 2T hole diameter is _______. Class Quiz #37 Article 2 Section V 1. The important aspects of controlling Geometric Unsharpness are determining the size of the radiation source “F”, Distance “D” from the source of radiation to the part and, _______________________________________. 2. Location markers are placed on the source side when Radiographing a curved object whose concave side is toward the source and when the “source-to material” distance is __________ the inside radius of the component. Class Quiz #38 Article 2 Section V 1. Wire type IQIs are placed____________________. a. parallel to the weld, i.e. along its length. b. across the weld, i.e. perpendicular. 2. The transmitted film density through the radiographic image of the body of the appropriate hole IQI or adjacent to the designated wire of a wire IQI and the area of interest shall be ___ minimum with a gamma source. a. 1.8 b. 2.0 3. Radiography shall be performed with a technique of sufficient sensitivity to display the designated hole IQI image and the_____, or the _________ of a wire IQI. 4. If the density of the radiograph anywhere through the area of interest varies by more than minus 15% or plus 30% from the density through the body of the hole IQI or adjacent to the designated wire of a wire IQI, within the minimum/maximum allowable density ranges specified in T-282.1, then an additional ______________. a. another radiograph shall be taken with at least 3 IQIs placed in exceptional areas. b. IQIs shall be used in each exceptional area or areas and another radiograph made.

16

Class Quiz #39 VIII Appendix 4 1. The maximum size of an isolated rounded indication allowed by VIII, Appendix 4 under any circumstances is ___________. a. ¼” b. 1/4t or 3/8” c. 3/8” 2. Rounded indications are defined to be Indications with a__________________________________________. a. maximum width of three times the length or less b. maximum length of three times the width or less c. minimum length of 1/3 the width. Class Quiz #40 VIII Appendix 4 1. A sequence of __________rounded indications shall be considered to be aligned when they touch a line parallel to the length of the weld drawn through the center of the two outer rounded indications. a. three or more b. four or less c. four or more 2. The charts for each thickness range represent full-scale 8 in. radiographs, and shall not be enlarged or reduced. a. True b. False, if false correct the statement ______.

17

Class Quiz #41 SE-797.2 Section V 1. In all Cases at least _____ thickness steps of calibration blocks should be used to check calibration. a. four b. three c. two 2. Calibration blocks must have round numbered steps, i.e. 0.100, 0.200… a. False b. True 3. The formula to calculation of the thickness of part is___. a. T = Vt/2 b. T = 2Vt 4. Which of the following applies to Case II of the Direct Contact method? a. When using this search unit, it is necessary that the equipment be capable of correcting for the time during which the sound passes through the delay line so that the end of the delay can be made to coincide with zero thickness. b. The display start is synchronized to the initial pulse. All display elements are linear. Full thickness is displayed on CRT. Class Quiz #42 Article 6 Section V 1. The standard temperature range for dye penetrant tests is ______. 2. After applying the dye penetrant at the standard temperature the proper dwell time for steel is _____. 3. Prior to applying the developer the part must cleaned of excess penetrant, this can be done by __________________. a. spraying solvent on to the part and wiping with a lint free cloth. b. wiping with a lint free cloth then spraying solvent on to a lint free cloth and lightly wiping the part. c. wiping with a lint free cloth, no other method is allowed.

18

Class Quiz #43 Article 6 Section V 1. The standard eye examination for a dye penetrant examiner is the______________________________ a. Jaeger Type No. 2 Standard Chart at a distance of exactly 12 in. b. Jaeger Type No. 2 Standard Chart at a distance of not less than 12 in. c. Jaeger Type No. 2 Standard Chart at a distance of not more than 12 in. 2. Only indications with major dimensions greater than ___in. shall be considered relevant. a. 1/32” b. 1/8” c. 1/16” Class Quiz #44 Article 7 Section V 1. Magnetic particle sensitivity is ______for surface discontinuities and _______ rapidly with increasing depth of subsurface discontinuities below the surface. a. least, increases b. greatest, decreases 2. The Pie Shaped indicator shall be positioned on the surface to be examined, such that the copper-plated side is ______from the inspected surface. a. away b. toward 3. With Dry Particles the magnetizing current shall remain _____ on while the examination medium is being applied. a. off b. on 4. A minimum light intensity of ______is required to ensure adequate sensitivity during visible (color contrast) magnetic particle examinations. a. 1000 fc/100 Lx b. 1000 fc/1000 Lx c. 100 fc/1000 Lx 5. Each alternating current electromagnetic yoke shall have a lifting power of at least ____lb at the maximum pole spacing that will be used. a. 20 b. 10 c. 40

19

Spacer Page

20

Section 21 Solutions Lesson Quizzes

Class Quizzes Solutions Class Quiz #1 UW-2 Service Restrictions 1. Which of the following types of welds are required if a vessel is determined to be in lethal service? c. Category A shall be of Type 1 only, B and C can be of Type 1 or Type 2. 2. Label these welds by Type.

Type 1

Type 2

Class Quiz #2 UW -3 Welded Joint Category 1. The category of a joint depends on: d. None of the above. 2. A circumferential weld to attach a flange is what Category? b. C A circumferential weld used to attach a seamless head is of what Category? a. B 4. The circumferential weld to attach a hemispherical head to a shell is a Category A.

1

5. Label these weld joints by Category A, B, C or D

Class Quiz #3 UW-51 Radiographic and Radioscopic Examination 1. All welded joints to be radiographed shall be examined in accordance with Article 2 of Section V except as otherwise specified. 2. A complete set of radiographs and records shall be retained by the Manufacturer until the Manufacturer’s Data Report has been signed by the Inspector. 3. While reviewing a radiograph an elongated indication was found to have a length of .375” in a .750” thick plate weld. This indication is Rejectable because the maximum allowed is .250" for this thickness. 4. The welded joint below was radiographed and found to have an elongated indication that was .243” in length. The maximum allowable length of an indication for this combination of thicknesses is 1/4 in. and this weld considered acceptable.

2

5. The length L, of the longest imperfection in the figure below is .259”. Based on this value the largest imperfection is unacceptable and since the aggregate (total) length is .504” that is acceptable but the weld is rejectable.

6. In the figure below what is the minimum distance D, between these two groups of aligned imperfections for the groups to be evaluated separately? b. 1.872”

Class Quiz # 4 Spot Radiography 1. Minimum number of Spot Radiographs is/are one spot (s), this rule must be applied on each vessel for each 50 ft increment of weld or fraction thereof for which a joint efficiency from column (b) of Table UW-12 is selected. 2. Who shall choose the location of Spot Radiographs? c. The Inspector shall choose unless he is not available and then the Manufacturer may do so. 3. In the drawing below the total number of spot radiographs needed to meet the minimum requirements is/are two. * Keep in mind the goal is to Radiographically Test every welder’s work in a 50’ increment. Bill and Jim welded on opposite sides of this section of weld.

Day Shift Stopped Here the first 50' increment

Clint and Jim welded on opposite sides of this section of weld.

Clint welded this section alone.

3

Class Quiz # 5 UW-11 Radiographic and Ultrasonic Examinations In the drawing below the paragraph that applies is; c. UW-11(a)(5) The desire to take E from Column A of Table UW-12

2. In the drawing below the paragraph that applies is; b. UW-11(a)(2) Thickness exceeded

t = 1.75"

t = 1.75"

t = 1.5" Full RT

t = 1.5"

4

Class Quiz # 6 UW-12 Joint Efficiencies 1. A Type 1 weld has received Spot Radiographic Testing the resulting Joint E is _______? c. 0.85 2. A Type 3 weld can be spot radiographed. False 3. A Type 2 weld has been Fully Radiographed; the Weld Joints E is ______. b. 0.90 4. A Type 2 weld has received Spot Radiographic Testing resulting in a Joint E of 0.80, this E could be improved to a 1.0 by _____________________. c. removing the backing, double welding thus creating a Type 1, and then applying Full RT. Class Quiz # 7 UG-27 Internal Pressure Cylindrical Shells 1. Calculate the thickness required for a vessel’s seamless shell made of SA-106 gr. B pipe. The O.D. is 12.75 inches. UW-11(a)(5)(b) has been applied. The shell will operate at a maximum of 500 psi. The stress allowed on the shell material is 15,000 psi. The vessel will be stamped RT 2. 1) From: Appendix 1-1

t=

PRo SE + 0.4 P

Givens: t =? P = 500 psi S = 15,000 psi E = 1.0 per UW-12(d) Ro =

12.75 = 6.375" 2

t=

500 x 6.375 = .2097" (15,000 x1.0) + (0.4 x 500)

Answer: Required t = .2097” Rounds to .210”

5

2. What is the maximum allowed working pressure on the following shell? The shell’s inside radius is 52 inches, and the shell’s thickness is .850 inches. The allowable stress for the shell's material is 15,000 psi. The joint efficiency of the shell's Category A joint is 1.0

P=

2) From: UG – 27 (c) (1) Givens: t = .850” P =? S = 15,000 psi E = 1.0 R = 52”

P=

SEt R + 0 .6 t

15,000 x1.0 x .850 = 52 + (0.6 x .850)

P= P=

Rounds to 242 psi

12,750 = 52 + .510

12,750 = 242.81 psi 52.510

Class Quiz #8 1. A vertical vessel shell has an MAWP of 200 psi, and an allowable stress of 14,800 psi. The original inside radius was 84”. The nameplate is stamped RT1 . The shell has corroded down to 1.28 inches. Its original t was 1.375". What is its current calculated MAWP in accordance with rules of Section VIII Division 1? From: UG-27 (c) (1)

P=

SEt (R + Corrosion) + 0.6 t

Givens: 14,800 x1.0 x1.28 18,944 18,944 t = 1.28” P= = = = 223.23 psi 84.095 + (0.6 x1.28) 84.095 + (0.768) 84.863) P =? S = 14,800 psi E = 1.0 RT 1 R = 84” = 84’ + (1.375-1.28) = 84.095” Rounds to 223 psi Class Quiz #9 UG-32 Internal Pressure Formed Heads 1. Calculate the required thickness of a 2 to 1 Ellipsoidal head with an inside diameter of 48 inches. The vessels will have a MAWP of 350 psi and will be in lethal service and stamped RT1. The joint used to join the head to shell will be a Type No. 2 from Table UW-12. The stress allowed on the head's material will be 15,000 psi.

PD

From: UG-32 (d) t = 2 SE − 0.2 P Givens: t =? P = 350 psi 350 x 48 S = 15,000 psi t= = .5613" E = 1.0 Full RT 1 ( 2 x15,000 x1.0) − (0.2 x 350) D = 48” inside diameter Rounds to .562"

6

Class Quiz # 9 2. A Torispherical head has corroded to a thickness of .353 " ; its inside crown radius is 56 inches. The head's material has a stress allowable of 13,800 psi. The shell is seamless and the spot radiography of UW-11(a)(5)(b) has been applied to the vessel. Can this head remain in service at 100 psi per Code? From: UG-32 (e) t = Givens: t = .353 P = 100 psi S = 13,800 psi E = 1.0 L = 56” crown radius

0.885PL SE - 0.1P

t=

0.885 x100 x 56 = .3593" (13,800 x1.0) − (0.1 x100)

Rounds to .360" 3. A Hemispherical head is being considered as a replacement on a vessel with a MAWP of 200 psi. The head's inside diameter will be 64 inches. What would be its required thickness if the head's material has a maximum allowable stress of 17,500 psi? The Category A type 1 joint that attaches the head will be spot radiographed. From: UG-32 (f) t =

PL 2 SE − 0.2 P

Givens: 200 x 32.0 t= = .2154" t =? ( 2 x17,500 x .85) − (0.2 x 200) P = 200 psi S = 17,500 psi E = .85 Spot RT per UW-12(b) and Table UW-12 Column B L = 32.0” inside spherical radius (D/2) Rounds to .216" 4. What would the required thickness for a seamless Ellipsoidal head be given the following variables? The Category B weld that will attach this head would not have UW-11(a)(5)(b) applied. From: UG-32 (d) t =

PD 2 SE − 0.2 P

Givens: t =? P = 200 psi S = 17,500 psi E = .85 No spot RT per UW-12(d) D = 64.0” Rounds to .431"

t=

200 x 64 = .4308" ( 2 x17,500 x .85) − (0.2 x 200)

7

Class Quiz #10 Hydrostatic Head of Water 1. What would be the pressure at the bottom of this vessel if an external pressure of 235 psi were applied? 235 + 43.3 = 278.3 psi

Class Quiz #11 Hydrostatic Head of Water 1. What would be the pressure at 16.5’ if the top read 410 psi instead of 400.125 ? 410 + 10.175 = 420.175 Since our part is only good for 410.3 we have now exceeded this shell course’s MAWP. Not allowed by Code rules!

8

Class Quiz # 12 Hydrostatic Head of Water 1. What would be the hydrostatic pressure exerted at each point in the vessel below? Bottom of top chamber 1.5’ x 0.433 = .6495 psi Bottom of main shell 7.5’ x 0.433 = 3.2475 psi Bottom of sump = 8.25’x .433 = 3.5722 Total H.H. = 3.5722 psi

Class Quiz #13 Depth of Formed Heads 1. The depth of a 2 to 1 ellipsoidal head having a diameter of 64 inches and a 1-1/2” flange is; c. 17-1/2” (64/4 = 16 + 1-1/2 + 17-1/2”) 2. What is the depth of a hemispherical head attached to a vessel shell that has inside diameter of 96” with an internal fit up? b. 48” (96”/2 = 48”)

9

Class Quiz #14 Pressure Testing UG-99/100/102 1. A vessel made of Stainless Steel is being hydrostatically tested after an alteration. The vessel's MAWP is 225 psi at 400 oF. The allowable stress at operating is 14,700 psi and 16,700 psi at the test temperature. 1. Hydrostatic Test a.

1.3 x 225 x

b.

16,700 = 332.295 psi 14,700

332.295 = 255.61 psi 1 .3

c. Min. gage range 1.5 x 332.295 = 498.4 ( 500 psi )Max. gage range 4 x 332.295 = 1329.18 ( 1000 psi )the gage pressure at the 4X range would be rounded down to closest standard range!

2. A pneumatic test of a vessel will be conducted to a pressure of 310 psi. Describe the 6 steps for raising the vessel to the test pressure. At what pressure shall the visual examination take place? Step 1 Raise the pressure to ½ the test pressure, ½ x 310 psi = 155 psi, then raise in steps of 1/10 of test pressure to full test pressure. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6

155+31=186 psi 186+31=217 psi 217+31=248 psi 248+31=279 psi 279+31=310 psi

The inspection pressure is 310/1.1 = 281.8 psi for visual inspection.

10

Class Quiz #15 UCS 56 PWHT 1. In the example below what is the shortest amount of time allowed to raise the weldment to a PWHT of 1100 °F if the furnace is at 800°F when the part is inserted? 1100 - 800°F = 300°F/200°F hour = 1-1/2 Hours

Class Quiz #16 UCS 56 PWHT 1. What are the minimum PWHT time and the minimum holding temperature for a P-Number 5A material that is 3” (inches) thick (75 mm)? 3 hours at 1250 oF (677 oC). 2. What is the PWHT normal holding temperature and time for a P-Number 3 material that is 3” (76 mm) thick? 1100 oF (593oC) 2 hours -15 minutes 3. What is the required time at the minimum holding temperature for a P-Number 1 Gr.1 weld that has a nominal governing thickness of 1-1/4 inch? The vessel will not be in a lethal service. There is no mandatory heat treatment in this thickness; it must exceed 1-1/4” Class Quiz #17 UCS 56.1 1. What is the total PWHT time at 950 oF for a 5 inch thick P-No 1 Group 2 material?

Lowered PWHT at 950 F

First 1 in. (25 mm) 10 hours Additional 1 in. (25 mm) add 15 min. 5 in (125 mm)

Additional 1 in. (25 mm) add 15 min. Additional 1 in. (25 mm) add 15 min. Additional 1 in. (25 mm) add 15 min. - Total 11 hours. 11

Class Quiz # 18 External Pressure UG-28 1. A vessel under external pressure has been found to a thickness of 1.123 ". The vessel is 8'-2" long and operates at a temperature of 300 oF. The vessel’s outside diameter is 54 inches. It is made of a material with a minimum yield of 30,000 psi. Presently the external working pressure is 350 psi. May this vessel continue to operate in accordance with the Code?

(1) Cylinders having:

Do values ≥ 10 t

This will always be the case on the exam! Testing to see if the paragraph applies:

Do 40 = = 32 t 1.25

Step 1 Our value of Do is 54 inches and L is 98 inches. We will use these to determine the ratio of:

L 98 = = 1.81 Do 54

Step 2 Enter the Factor A chart at the value of 1.8 determined above. Step 3. Then move across horizontally to the curve at approximately Do/t = 48. Then down from this point to find the value of Factor A which is approximately .0022

12

Step 4 Using our value of Factor A calculated in Step 3, enter the Factor B (CS-2) chart on the bottom, then vertically up to the material temperature line given in the stated problem (in our case 300 o F). Step 5 Next step is across to find the value of Factor B. We find that Factor B is approximately 15000. Note due to the variance in the reading of the charts answers and values may vary, but should be within a 5% range of the solution.

Step 6 Using this value of Factor B, calculate the value of the maximum allowable external pressure Pa using the following formula:

Pa =

Pa =

4B 3( Do ) t

4 x15,000 60,000 = = 625 psi 3( 32 ) 96

Answer Range: 593 - 656 psi

13

Class Quiz # 19 Charpy Impacts UCS-66 1. What is the lowest temperature that a 1.5 inch thickness Curve D material can be designed for without impact tests?

14

Class Quiz #20 Charpy UCS-66.1 1. What would be the adjusted MDMT for a vessel 1.5” thick from Curve D with a Coincident Ratio of .90? – 14oF lowered by 10oF = -24oF “Algebraic Sum”. The adjusted “New MDMT”! Class Quiz # 21 Charpy Impacts UG-84 1. What specification must impact testing procedures conform to? SA-370 (second paragraph of UG-84) 2. What type of Impact Test does the Code recognize? Charpy V-notch (only one mentioned in UG-84, first paragraph UG-84 Charpy impact tests shall be performed) 3. What are the dimensions of a standard Charpy Impact specimen? They shall be 2.165” long x 0.394” (51mm long10mm x10 mm) thick see Fig UG-84 4. How many specimens comprise a single set? Three make a set 5. How many sets of specimens are required for a weld procedure test coupon 1 3/4 inches thick? Three sets, two from the weld metal and one set of heat affected zone specimens 6. When welding a procedure test plate for impact testing, what must the P No. and Group No. be? What type of heat treatment must be applied to the test plate? The P No. and the Group No. must be the same as will welded in production and be in the same heat treated condition. 7. Name the two types of test specimens required for all welding procedures. Hint: Where do they come from? Weld Metal and Heat Affected Zone

15

Class Quiz #22 Fillet Welds and Reinforcement 1. A fillet weld has a leg size of 1 1/8". What is its throat size? “Throat = Leg Size x .707” 1.125 x .707 = .7953” = throat size

2. A fillet weld has a throat size of .600". What is its leg size rounded up to the next fractional 1/16"? Leg Size =

Throat .707

.600 = .8486 .707

Therefore the next 1/16 would be a 7/8” 13/16 <. 8486 < 7/8 (14/16) or .8125 <. 8486 <. 875 Class Quiz #23 Fillet Welds and Reinforcement 3. Using Fig. UW-16.1 sketch (i) determine the minimum leg size for the following based on the value of tmin = .750” Determine leg size. t min = .750” 1.25 x .750 = .9375” =

t 1 + t 2 ≥ 1 1 t min 4

.9375/2 = .46875 (throat) to find Leg size =

.46875 = .6630 .707

.6630 = the individual leg sizes of two equal sized fillet welds. Converting to fractional inches 11/16 = .6875 5/8 = .625 So .625 < .6630 < .6875 rounded up to the fractional 1/16” the leg size is 11/16”. Class Quiz #24 Reinforcement for Openings in Shells and Heads 1. Corrosion allowance must be deducted from all surfaces in contact with the corrosive substance before calculations are performed. 2. A = d x tr (Area required) by the API 510 Body of Knowledge. 3. Answer: 2/3 points for the reinforcement and 2/3 points for the hydrostatic calculations. Which one takes the most study time? Which one of these are you most likely to do in actual practice? Which one of these is the most likely to be on the exam?

16

Class Quiz #25 Just Milling Around 1. Converting the following decimal fractions into Mils. .195” = 195 Mils .023 = 23 Mils .009 = 9 Mils. .0011 = 1.1 Mils. Corrosion Allowance 95 Mils

= 14.2 Yrs. Rem. Life

Corrosion Rate 6.7“ Mils/Yr.

2. Solve this Remaining Life problem using Mils. Corrosion Allowance .095“ = 14.2 Yrs. Remaining Life Corrosion Rate .0067" Class Quiz #26 Time 1. A vessel shell course was replaced in October 1st of 1980. The initial or, baseline thickness was .505”. The most recent actual thickness measured was .485” in January 1st 1991. What is the corrosion rate, based in Mils per year in January of 1991? .505(t-initial) - .485(t-actual) = .020” = 20 Mils Oct.1st 1990 – Oct.1st 1980 = 10 years plus November, December of 1990 and January of 1991 so; 10 yrs. 3 Mos. 10 - 3/12th (3/12 = .250) = 10.25 years Therefore; Metal Loss 20 Mils Time 10.25 Years

= Corrosion Rate = 1.95 Mils/Yr.

17

Class Quiz #27 Defining Each Essential Variable 1. An 8.5” T coupon was welded to produce a PQR to support welding of a reactor shell course. The maximum T qualified with this coupon is ___”. 8.5 X 1.33 = 11.305 Class Quiz #28 Base Metals 1. A 1”(25mm) to 1”(25mm) P-No.1 coupon was welded entirely by the SMAW process. The minimum thickness qualified is 3/16 ” and the maximum is 2”. Class Quiz # 29 Base Metals 2. A PQR coupon is 1-1/4”(1.250) thick (T). The weld will be made in three passes, the root pass/layer will be 1/4” (.250) thick and second and third layers/passes will be each be 1/2”(.500) thick. The maximum range of thickness for this qualification will be 2-1/2 (2.500)”. Read closely, the rule states it must exceed 1/2” to be limited to 1.1 x T. Class Quiz # 30 Base Metals 1. Using the table QW-424 in Section IX list the base metals qualified if we successfully weld a procedure coupon joining P-No 5A to P-No 5A.

P-No. 5A to 5A, 4, 3, or 1, it does not qualify 4 , 3, or 1 to each other or to their selves. 2. P-No. 5A to P-No. 4, 3, or 1 Qualifies?

P-No. 5A to any metal assigned 4, 3, or 1. It does not qualify 4, 3, or 1 to each other or to their selves.

18

Class Quiz # 31 Welders Qualifications 1. If a welder qualified on a NPS 6 inch pipe coupon the range of diameter qualifications in production with the WPS he tested to will be 2-7/8” to unlimited. 2. If tested with a NPS 2 inch coupon what is his minimum and maximum diameter range is 1” to unlimited. Class Quiz #32 1. How can we qualify a welder for unlimited thickness with both F-No.3 and 4 in a single coupon? * Hint See Note 1 of table QW-452.1(b) 1. If he welds a coupon that is at least 1” thick and deposits at least 1/2” of E-6010 and at least 1/2” of E-7018 using a minimum of three weld layers for each filler metal. Note:The welder can deposit unlimited t with any F-No.3 and/or F-No.4 with any production WPS he is otherwise fully qualified for such as, position, P-No., backing, diameter, progression etc. Class Quiz # 33 Diameter/Position/Thickness/Progression A welder performs a test on a NPS 4” (4.5”) pipe coupon in the 6G position. The coupon is Schedule 160 and has a wall T of 0.531”. The welder will use SMAW with E-6010 for the root pass for a total weld deposit t of .125” (1/8”). The balance of the weld deposit t (.406”) will be performed using 3 weld layers of E-7018 filler metal. All welding will be uphill during the test. His qualifications as listed in table QW-353 are? The test qualifies all positions with a minimum diameter of 2-7/8” and a maximum of unlimited. The test also qualifies the welder to deposit .250” inches of F- No. 3 and .812” inches of F-No.4. The welder will also be qualified to weld with or without backing. The thickest weld he can make using this combination in production is .250 +.812 or 1.062”. The welder’s production welds must be made using uphill progression.

19

Class Quiz #34 Article 1 Section V 1. The acceptance standards for radiography and dye penetrant testing are found in the referencing Code Section. 2. A written procedure is always needed for any NDE process when it is required by the referencing Code Section. 3. Who shall have the NDE procedure made available to them? c. The manufacturer’s NDE personnel and the inspector upon request. Class Quiz #35 Article 2 1. The purpose of the using the Lead Letter B is to determine if backscatter radiation is exposing the film. 2. The Lead Letter B is placed______________________. b. on the back of the film cassette 3. Film density is measured using a __________________. c. Step wedge comparison film or a densitometer. Class Quiz #36 Article 2 Section V 1. The thickness of a Hole Type IQI Designation #25 is 0.025” and the 4T hole diameter is 0.100”. 2. The thickness of a Hole Type IQI Designation #7 is 0.0075” and the 2T hole diameter is 0.020”.

20

Class Quiz #37 Article 2 Section V 1. The important aspects of controlling Geometric Unsharpness are determining the size of the radiation source “F” , Distance “D” from the source of radiation to the part and, the distance “d” from the source side of the object being radiographed to the film. 2. Location markers are placed on the source side when Radiographing a curved object whose concave side is toward the source and when the “source-to material” distance is less than the inside radius of the component. Class Quiz #38 Article 2 Section V 1. Wire type IQIs are placed____________________. b. across the weld, i.e. perpendicular. 2. The transmitted film density through the radiographic image of the body of the appropriate hole IQI or adjacent to the designated wire of a wire IQI and the area of interest shall be ___ minimum with a gamma source. b. 2.0 3. Radiography shall be performed with a technique of sufficient sensitivity to display the designated hole IQI image and the 2T hole, or the essential wire of a wire IQI. 4. If the density of the radiograph anywhere through the area of interest varies by more than minus 15% or plus 30% from the density through the body of the hole IQI or adjacent to the designated wire of a wire IQI, within the minimum/maximum allowable density ranges specified in T-282.1, then an additional ______________. b. IQIs shall be used in each exceptional area or areas and another radiograph made. Class Quiz #39 VIII Appendix 4 1. The maximum size of an isolated rounded indication allowed by VIII, Appendix 4 under any circumstances is ___________. c. 3/8” 2. Rounded indications are defined to be Indications with a__________________________________________. b. maximum length of three times the width or less Class Quiz #40 VIII Appendix 4 1. A sequence of __________rounded indications shall be considered to be aligned when they touch a line parallel to the length of the weld drawn through the center of the two outer rounded indications. c. four or more 2. The charts for each thickness range represent full-scale 8 in. radiographs, and shall not be enlarged or reduced. b. False, the charts represent full-scale 6 in. radiographs. 21

Class Quiz #41 SE-797.2 Section V 1. In all Cases at least _____ thickness steps of calibration blocks should be used to check calibration. c. two 2. Calibration blocks must have round numbered steps, i.e. 0.100, 0.200… a. False 3. The formula to calculation of the thickness of part is___. a. T = Vt/2 4. Which of the following applies to Case II of the Direct Contact method? a. When using this search unit, it is necessary that the equipment be capable of correcting for the time during which the sound passes through the delay line so that the end of the delay can be made to coincide with zero thickness. Class Quiz #42 Article 6 Section V 1. The standard temperature range for dye penetrant tests is 50 to 125 oF. 2. After applying the dye penetrant at the standard temperature the proper dwell time for steel is 5 minutes. 3. Prior to applying the developer the part must cleaned of excess penetrant, this can be done by __________________. b. wiping with a lint free cloth then spraying solvent on to a lint free cloth and lightly wiping the part.

22

Class Quiz #43 Article 6 Section V 1. The standard eye examination for a dye penetrant examiner is the______________________________ b. Jaeger Type No. 2 Standard Chart at a distance of not less than 12 in. 2. Only indications with major dimensions greater than ___in. shall be considered relevant. c. 1/16” Class Quiz #44 Article 7 Section V 1. Magnetic particle sensitivity is ______for surface discontinuities and _______ rapidly with increasing depth of subsurface discontinuities below the surface. b. greatest, decreases 2. The Pie Shaped indicator shall be positioned on the surface to be examined, such that the copper-plated side is ______from the inspected surface. b. toward 3. With Dry Particles the magnetizing current shall remain _____ on while the examination medium is being applied. b. on 4. A minimum light intensity of ______is required to ensure adequate sensitivity during visible (color contrast) magnetic particle examinations. c. 100 fc/1000 Lx 5. Each alternating current electromagnetic yoke shall have a lifting power of at least ____lb at the maximum pole spacing that will be used. b. 10

23

Spacer Page

24